1 #LyX 2.5 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -1162675398 "Tobias Hilbricht" hilbricht@linopus.de
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
173 by the \SpecialChar LyX
178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
180 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
181 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
182 Documentation mailing list:
184 \begin_inset CommandInset href
186 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 \begin_inset Newline newline
206 \begin_inset Note Note
209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
210 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
216 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
224 \begin_layout Standard
225 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
226 LatexCommand tableofcontents
233 \begin_layout Chapter
237 \begin_layout Section
238 What is \SpecialChar LyX
242 \begin_layout Standard
244 is a document preparation system.
245 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
248 business letters and proposals,
250 It is unlike most other
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
258 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
259 That means that when you type a section header,
261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
290 takes care of the typesetting for you;
291 so you deal only with concepts,
295 \begin_layout Standard
296 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
301 If you haven't read it yet,
307 \begin_layout Standard
312 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
315 the format of all of the manuals.
316 If you don't read it,
317 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
318 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
321 \begin_layout Section
326 \begin_layout Standard
327 Like most applications,
329 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
330 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
331 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
336 This is not a bug or an oversight,
338 When you read a book,
339 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
340 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
341 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
346 The first case is large images.
347 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
348 left click on the image and use the option
359 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
361 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
366 menus and toolbar buttons,
367 have a look at Appendix
372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
374 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
382 \begin_layout Section
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
389 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
391 Just select the manual you want to read from the
398 \begin_layout Section
399 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
401 \begin_inset CommandInset label
403 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
410 \begin_layout Standard
411 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
412 can be configured via the menu
414 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
418 \begin_inset Index idx
423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
430 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
433 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 packages are available.
435 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
436 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
437 was installed on your system,
438 you might have some items that you installed locally,
440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
444 \begin_inset space \space{}
447 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
449 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
451 To force \SpecialChar LyX
452 to re-inspect your system use
454 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
458 \begin_inset Index idx
463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
464 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
470 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
471 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
474 \begin_layout Section
477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
479 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
486 \begin_layout Standard
487 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
488 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
489 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs.
490 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
491 every \SpecialChar LyX
492 document can still be output as plain text,
493 as Docbook or as XHTML.
496 \begin_layout Standard
497 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
499 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
500 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
503 \begin_layout Standard
504 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
505 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
506 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
508 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
516 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
519 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
523 \begin_inset Index idx
528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
529 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
537 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
544 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
548 \begin_layout Chapter
549 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
553 \begin_layout Section
554 Basic File Operations
555 \begin_inset Index idx
560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
569 \begin_layout Standard
574 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
577 \begin_layout Itemize
600 \begin_layout Itemize
617 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
623 \begin_layout Itemize
646 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
666 \begin_layout Itemize
681 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \begin_layout Itemize
723 arg "buffer-write-as"
729 \begin_layout Itemize
743 \begin_layout Itemize
749 \begin_layout Itemize
763 \begin_layout Itemize
778 \begin_layout Standard
779 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
780 with a few minor differences.
783 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
794 command lists the available templates.
795 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features and possibly propose text fragments for the document,
796 features and text you would otherwise need to set or enter manually.
797 They can be of use for certain classes,
798 especially those for writing letters (see section
803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
805 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
811 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
814 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
820 \begin_layout Standard
821 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
854 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
855 to open a file or create a new one,
856 that big blank space on the screen is just that —
865 \begin_layout Standard
886 are useful if multiple people work on the same document at the same time.
890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
891 If you plan to do this,
892 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
895 \begin_inset Flex Emph
898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
899 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
906 \begin_inset Flex Emph
909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
915 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
933 will reload the document from disk.
934 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last saved version.
943 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
946 \begin_layout Section
947 \begin_inset CommandInset label
949 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
954 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
957 \begin_layout Standard
959 lays much stress on safety.
960 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
961 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
963 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
965 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
966 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
967 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
970 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
971 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
972 does not simply make a backup file,
973 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
974 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
975 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
982 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
987 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
990 \begin_layout Standard
992 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
995 \begin_layout Subsection
999 \begin_layout Standard
1002 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1004 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1018 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1023 in preferences (see section
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1030 reference "sec:Paths"
1039 then all backups are stored there.
1040 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1041 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1042 but also the path in their name,
1044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1058 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1063 \begin_layout Standard
1064 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1065 and you need to enable
1066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1073 in order to see them.
1076 \begin_layout Standard
1077 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1078 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1080 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1083 \begin_layout Subsection
1087 \begin_layout Standard
1090 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1092 \begin_inset space ~
1096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1098 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1103 As opposed to the backup files,
1104 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1127 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1133 with all changes saved.
1134 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1139 program crash or power outage),
1140 and this is when they might become useful.
1143 \begin_layout Subsection
1147 \begin_layout Standard
1149 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1150 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1151 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1152 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1155 \begin_layout Standard
1156 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1167 myfile.lyx.emergency
1170 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1172 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1175 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1176 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1179 \begin_layout Subsection
1180 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1184 \begin_layout Standard
1185 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1186 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1188 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1191 keeps a copy of the old version,
1194 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1197 where <n> is the old format (e.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1204 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1207 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1208 that is alongside the original document or,
1210 in the backup directory.
1213 \begin_layout Standard
1214 As with backup files,
1215 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1219 \begin_layout Subsection
1220 When to Use Which File?
1223 \begin_layout Standard
1224 Now why all these files?
1225 Because they have different purposes.
1229 \begin_layout Standard
1231 terminates unexpectedly,
1234 \begin_layout Enumerate
1235 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1237 This file has the latest changes,
1238 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1241 \begin_layout Enumerate
1242 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1247 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1249 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1251 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1252 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1254 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1257 \begin_layout Enumerate
1258 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1259 use the backup file.
1260 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1261 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1262 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1265 \begin_layout Standard
1266 The fourth type of file,
1267 the backup file from old versions,
1268 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1272 So much for the safety net.
1273 We hope you will not need it,
1275 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1276 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1279 \begin_layout Section
1280 Basic Editing Features
1281 \begin_inset Index idx
1286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1295 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1302 \begin_layout Standard
1303 Like most modern word processors,
1305 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1306 can move by character,
1309 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1310 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1311 editing features and how to access them.
1312 We will start with cut and paste.
1315 \begin_layout Standard
1316 As you might expect,
1321 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1322 along with various other editing features.
1323 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1327 \begin_layout Itemize
1333 \begin_inset Index idx
1338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1368 \begin_layout Itemize
1374 \begin_inset Index idx
1379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1409 \begin_layout Itemize
1415 \begin_inset Index idx
1420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1446 \begin_layout Itemize
1450 \begin_inset space ~
1456 \begin_layout Itemize
1460 \begin_inset space ~
1466 \begin_layout Itemize
1470 \begin_inset space ~
1474 \begin_inset space ~
1480 \begin_inset Index idx
1485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1494 \begin_inset Index idx
1499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1515 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1525 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 The first three are self-explanatory.
1533 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1534 and other programs using
1556 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1561 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1562 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1563 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1564 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1568 \begin_inset space ~
1573 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1574 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1581 \begin_inset space ~
1586 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1587 Possible formats include HTML,
1592 \begin_inset space ~
1599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1608 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1610 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1614 \begin_inset space \space{}
1617 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1620 \begin_layout Standard
1624 \begin_inset space ~
1627 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1629 \begin_inset space ~
1633 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1637 \begin_inset space ~
1646 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1647 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1648 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1652 \begin_inset space ~
1658 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1659 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1664 \begin_inset space ~
1667 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1673 \begin_inset space ~
1681 \begin_inset space ~
1684 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1687 paste from the primary selection.
1688 This is normally the currently selected text.
1691 \begin_layout Standard
1694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 \begin_inset space ~
1700 \begin_inset space ~
1708 \begin_inset space ~
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1718 Once you have found a word or expression,
1724 \begin_inset space ~
1739 shortcut) to skip the currently selected word,
1743 \begin_inset space ~
1755 arg "word-find-backward"
1758 shortcut) to search backwards.
1759 Even if you close the widget,
1769 arg "word-find-backward"
1772 will search further.
1775 \begin_layout Standard
1780 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1783 \begin_inset space ~
1788 field and searches the next match.
1792 \begin_inset space ~
1797 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1800 \begin_layout Standard
1802 the following options are available:
1805 \begin_layout Itemize
1810 \begin_inset space ~
1815 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1816 If the toggle is set,
1818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1829 will not match the word
1830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1845 \begin_layout Itemize
1851 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1852 to only find complete words,
1854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1886 \begin_layout Itemize
1892 will limit search and replace,
1894 to the current cursor selection.
1897 \begin_layout Itemize
1903 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
1904 without pressing the
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1915 \begin_layout Itemize
1920 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
1921 If this is not checked,
1922 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1923 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1924 so you need to put it back manually.
1927 \begin_layout Standard
1928 \paragraph_spacing single
1929 The widget also has a
1933 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
1934 hiding replace and options.
1940 button brings you back to the full size.
1943 \begin_layout Standard
1944 \paragraph_spacing single
1947 also offers an advanced
1950 \begin_inset space ~
1954 \begin_inset space ~
1959 feature that is described in section
1960 \begin_inset space ~
1964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1966 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1974 \begin_layout Standard
1978 \begin_inset space \space{}
1982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1990 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
1991 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
1995 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2002 \begin_layout Standard
2006 arg "inset-select-all"
2009 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2010 When the cursor is inside an inset
2013 arg "inset-select-all"
2016 selects the content of the inset.
2020 arg "inset-select-all"
2023 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2027 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2030 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2033 \begin_layout Section
2035 \begin_inset Index idx
2040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2047 \begin_inset Index idx
2052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2061 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2068 \begin_layout Standard
2069 If you make a mistake,
2070 you can easily recover from it.
2072 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2075 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2078 or the toolbar button
2085 If you accidentally undo too much,
2088 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2091 or the toolbar button
2098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2105 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2109 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2112 \begin_layout Standard
2121 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2123 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2124 but by blocks of text.
2127 \begin_layout Section
2129 \begin_inset Index idx
2134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2143 \begin_layout Standard
2144 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2147 \begin_layout Enumerate
2152 \begin_layout Itemize
2157 once anywhere in the edit window.
2158 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2162 \begin_layout Enumerate
2167 \begin_layout Itemize
2174 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2180 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2181 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2182 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2185 \begin_layout Itemize
2186 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 \begin_layout Enumerate
2204 \begin_layout Standard
2205 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2206 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2210 \begin_layout Section
2212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2214 name "sec:Navigating"
2219 \begin_inset Index idx
2224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2233 \begin_layout Standard
2235 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2238 \begin_layout Itemize
2243 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2246 \begin_layout Itemize
2248 which is accessed either by the menu
2250 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2252 \begin_inset space ~
2257 or by the toolbar button
2260 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2266 \begin_layout Itemize
2267 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2269 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2272 and use the same menu to return to them.
2273 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2276 \begin_layout Standard
2280 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2285 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2286 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2288 \begin_inset space ~
2293 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2294 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2297 \begin_layout Standard
2302 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2306 \begin_layout Subsection
2308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2310 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2315 \begin_inset Index idx
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2322 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2337 \begin_inset Index idx
2342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Standard
2352 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2354 labels and cross-references (see section
2355 \begin_inset space ~
2359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2361 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2368 or citations (see section
2369 \begin_inset space ~
2373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2375 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2381 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2384 \begin_layout Standard
2385 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2386 For example with citations,
2387 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2390 \begin_layout Standard
2395 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2397 if you are displaying the list of
2399 Labels and References
2401 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2402 you can enter the text
2403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2410 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2414 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2419 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2420 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2425 option keeps it in the current view state.
2426 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2427 \begin_inset space ~
2430 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2431 \begin_inset space ~
2435 the subsections of sections
2436 \begin_inset space ~
2439 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2444 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2445 \begin_inset space ~
2450 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2459 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2462 \begin_layout Standard
2469 button refreshes the TOC (useful while editing if you have changed sections in the document).
2470 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2483 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2485 you can move section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset space ~
2493 2.4 or after section
2494 \begin_inset space ~
2499 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2512 (or the corresponding key bindings
2520 ) you can change the level of sections.
2521 You can make section
2522 \begin_inset space ~
2526 \begin_inset space ~
2530 \begin_inset space ~
2536 \begin_layout Standard
2537 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2541 \begin_layout Subsection
2542 Horizontal Scrolling
2543 \begin_inset Index idx
2548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2560 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2577 \begin_layout Standard
2579 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2580 \begin_inset space ~
2583 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2584 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2588 \begin_layout Standard
2589 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2593 \begin_layout Itemize
2595 is used on a small tablet computer
2598 \begin_layout Itemize
2599 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2611 \begin_inset space ~
2624 \begin_layout Itemize
2625 Math constructs with long command names
2628 \begin_layout Standard
2629 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2630 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
2631 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2632 window so that table
2633 \begin_inset space ~
2637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2639 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2645 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
2646 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2649 \begin_layout Standard
2650 \begin_inset Float table
2657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2658 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2663 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2667 Horizontal scrolling test.
2675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2677 \begin_inset Tabular
2678 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2679 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2682 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 \begin_layout Section
2725 Input/Word Completion
2726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2728 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2733 \begin_inset Index idx
2738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2745 \begin_inset Index idx
2750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2783 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
2784 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
2787 \begin_layout Standard
2788 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2791 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2796 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2803 \begin_inset space ~
2807 \begin_inset space ~
2812 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2816 \begin_inset space ~
2821 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2822 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2825 \begin_inset space ~
2831 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
2832 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2835 \begin_layout Standard
2837 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
2842 key to accept a proposed completion.
2843 If several completions are possible,
2844 a popup is opened showing them.
2845 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2852 \begin_layout Standard
2853 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
2855 the special math option
2859 enables characters to be composed.
2861 if you want to insert the character
2862 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2866 you can input the characters
2867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2878 in a formula to create it.
2879 This is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
2880 A list of supported character combinations can be found in the file
2884 located in \SpecialChar LyX
2885 's installation folder.
2890 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2891 In the example above,
2897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2928 \begin_layout Section
2930 \begin_inset Index idx
2935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2942 \begin_inset Index idx
2947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2949 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2964 \begin_inset Index idx
2969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2971 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
2974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2988 \begin_layout Standard
2989 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3005 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3008 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3012 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3013 \begin_inset space ~
3017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3019 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3027 \begin_layout Standard
3032 \begin_inset space ~
3041 \begin_inset space ~
3066 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3070 \begin_layout Labeling
3071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3075 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3076 LatexCommand nomenclature
3078 description "Tabulator key"
3085 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3087 If you do not understand this,
3089 \begin_inset space ~
3093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3095 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3103 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3110 \begin_inset space ~
3114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3116 reference "subsec:Lists"
3125 If you are still confused,
3131 \begin_inset Newline newline
3139 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3140 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3143 \begin_layout Labeling
3144 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3148 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3149 LatexCommand nomenclature
3151 description "Escape key"
3159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 to cancel operations.
3169 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3172 \begin_layout Labeling
3173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3178 These move the cursor,
3180 to the beginning and end of a line,
3181 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3184 \begin_layout Standard
3185 There are three modifier keys:
3188 \begin_layout Labeling
3189 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3207 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3208 LatexCommand nomenclature
3210 description "Control key"
3215 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3219 \begin_layout Itemize
3229 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3232 \begin_layout Itemize
3242 it moves by words instead of characters.
3245 \begin_layout Itemize
3255 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3260 \begin_layout Labeling
3261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3279 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3280 LatexCommand nomenclature
3282 description "Shift key"
3287 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3290 \begin_layout Labeling
3291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3309 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3310 LatexCommand nomenclature
3312 description "Alt or Meta key"
3317 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3318 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3319 If you have both keys,
3320 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3325 \begin_inset Newline newline
3328 This key does many different things,
3329 but it also activates the
3331 menu accelerator keys
3334 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3335 it selects that menu item.
3339 \begin_layout Standard
3342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3348 \begin_inset space ~
3352 \begin_inset space ~
3358 \begin_inset space ~
3366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3385 \begin_inset space ~
3391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3401 \begin_layout Standard
3406 manual lists all other things bound to the
3414 \begin_layout Standard
3415 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3416 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3417 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3419 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3420 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3421 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3438 followed by a capital
3445 \begin_layout Chapter
3448 \begin_inset Index idx
3453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3456 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 \begin_layout Section
3475 \begin_inset Index idx
3480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 \begin_layout Subsection
3503 \begin_layout Standard
3504 Before you do anything else,
3505 before you ever start writing a document,
3506 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3507 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3512 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3513 and format the title of your document differently.
3516 \begin_layout Standard
3521 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3522 By setting the document class,
3523 you automatically select these properties,
3524 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3525 If you don't choose a document class,
3527 picks one for you by default.
3528 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3531 \begin_layout Subsection
3533 \begin_inset Index idx
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3540 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3555 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3557 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3564 \begin_layout Standard
3565 You can select a class using the
3567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3572 \begin_inset Index idx
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3594 Select the class you want to use,
3595 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
3598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3602 \begin_layout Standard
3603 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3608 \begin_layout Description
3609 Article for basic articles
3612 \begin_layout Description
3613 Report for basic reports
3616 \begin_layout Description
3617 Book for writing a book
3620 \begin_layout Description
3621 Letter for US-style letters
3624 \begin_layout Standard
3625 There are also some non-standard classes,
3626 which \SpecialChar LyX
3627 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3629 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3630 distributions will include many of these.
3631 Here are some of the classes.
3632 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3634 Special Document Classes
3643 \begin_layout Description
3644 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3647 \begin_layout Description
3648 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
3651 \begin_layout Description
3652 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
3655 \begin_layout Description
3656 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
3657 There are three article layouts available.
3658 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
3659 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3660 All result-type statements (propositions,
3662 and so on) are sequenced together,
3665 and the like have their own sequence.
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3670 sequential numbering
3671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3674 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
3675 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3676 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3677 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3680 \begin_layout Description
3681 Beamer Layout for presentations
3684 \begin_layout Description
3685 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3686 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3688 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3692 \begin_layout Description
3693 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3696 \begin_layout Description
3698 \begin_inset space ~
3701 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3704 \begin_layout Description
3705 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3708 \begin_layout Description
3709 Foils Used to make transparencies
3712 \begin_layout Description
3713 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3714 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3716 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
3720 \begin_layout Description
3721 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3724 \begin_layout Description
3725 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3728 \begin_layout Description
3729 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3732 \begin_layout Description
3733 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
3734 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
3735 automatic print space calculation etc.
3736 (Is used by this document.)
3739 \begin_layout Description
3740 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3743 \begin_layout Description
3744 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3747 \begin_layout Description
3752 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
3753 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
3754 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
3755 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3759 \begin_layout Description
3760 Slides Used to make transparencies
3763 \begin_layout Description
3765 \begin_inset space ~
3768 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3771 \begin_layout Description
3772 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3775 \begin_layout Standard
3776 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
3777 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3779 Special Document Classes
3787 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
3790 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3794 \begin_layout Standard
3795 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3797 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3798 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset Index idx
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3809 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3832 If you open a document that uses such a class,
3833 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
3834 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3837 \begin_layout Standard
3840 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
3847 are highly specialized.
3849 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
3850 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
3851 with a growing number.
3852 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3853 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
3854 There are just too many of them.
3855 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3868 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3869 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
3871 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3874 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3881 manual for information on how to install them.
3882 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3888 \begin_layout Standard
3889 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3890 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
3891 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3893 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3894 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
3895 The \SpecialChar LyX
3896 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3899 users can write their own layout files,
3900 and many users have done so.
3903 Installing New Document Classes,
3911 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3914 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3918 name "subsec:Modules"
3923 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Standard
3948 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
3949 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3950 This is not available in any document class,
3951 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
3957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3961 \begin_inset Index idx
3966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3983 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
3986 \begin_layout Standard
3987 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3988 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
3990 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
3991 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3992 You can still use the module while editing your file,
3993 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
3994 since \SpecialChar LyX
3995 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3996 file without the missing prerequisites.
3997 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
3998 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4001 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4005 \begin_inset Index idx
4010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4011 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4030 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4033 \begin_layout Standard
4034 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4043 Some modules require other modules,
4044 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4046 will advise you about these things.
4054 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4058 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4063 \begin_inset Index idx
4068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4070 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4089 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4091 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4092 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4093 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4096 a particular document has very special needs,
4097 but you need a specific inset or text style only that one time.
4098 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4100 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4118 manual for information on how to use it.
4121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4125 \begin_layout Standard
4126 Each class has a default set of options.
4127 Here's a quick table describing them:
4130 \begin_layout Standard
4131 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4137 \begin_layout Standard
4139 \begin_inset Tabular
4140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4141 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4146 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4600 \begin_layout Standard
4601 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4607 \begin_layout Standard
4608 You're probably also wondering what
4609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4613 \begin_inset space ~
4617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4621 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4622 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4628 the rest do not and begin instead with the
4633 Some document classes,
4634 such as the ones for letters,
4635 don't use any section headings.
4656 We will describe these headings fully in section
4657 \begin_inset space ~
4661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4663 reference "subsec:Headings"
4671 \begin_layout Subsection
4673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4675 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4680 \begin_inset Index idx
4685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4702 \begin_inset Index idx
4707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4709 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4726 \begin_layout Standard
4727 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4736 \begin_inset space ~
4744 \begin_inset space ~
4750 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
4751 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4752 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
4753 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4754 -class and its options,
4755 you have to read its manual.
4758 \begin_layout Standard
4762 \begin_inset space ~
4769 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4775 \begin_inset space ~
4780 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4781 You can choose between the following five options:
4784 \begin_layout Labeling
4785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4790 Use default page style of current class.
4793 \begin_layout Labeling
4794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4799 No page numbers or headings.
4802 \begin_layout Labeling
4803 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4811 \begin_layout Labeling
4812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4817 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4818 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4819 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
4822 \begin_layout Labeling
4823 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4828 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4834 \begin_inset Index idx
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4842 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4857 How they are defined is explained in section
4858 \begin_inset space ~
4862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4864 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4874 \begin_inset space ~
4878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4880 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4888 \begin_layout Subsection
4889 Paper Size and Orientation
4890 \begin_inset Index idx
4895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4897 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4914 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4921 \begin_layout Standard
4922 You can find the following options in the menu
4925 \begin_inset space ~
4932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4936 \begin_inset Index idx
4941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4943 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4960 \begin_layout Labeling
4961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4965 \begin_inset space ~
4970 What size paper to print on.
4975 \begin_layout Itemize
4981 \begin_layout Itemize
4987 \begin_layout Itemize
4993 \begin_layout Itemize
4999 \begin_layout Itemize
5007 \begin_layout Itemize
5013 \begin_layout Itemize
5020 \begin_layout Labeling
5021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5026 To choose whether to output as
5037 \begin_layout Labeling
5038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5042 \begin_inset space ~
5047 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5048 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5051 \begin_layout Subsection
5053 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5055 name "subsec:Margins"
5060 \begin_inset Index idx
5065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5067 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5082 \begin_inset Index idx
5087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5096 \begin_layout Standard
5097 Paper margins are set in the menu
5099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5103 \begin_inset Index idx
5108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5110 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5127 \begin_layout Standard
5128 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5129 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5132 \begin_layout Subsection
5136 \begin_layout Standard
5137 If you change a document class,
5139 has to convert everything into the new class.
5140 That includes the paragraph environments.
5141 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5142 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5143 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5144 If this is the case,
5145 and you change the document class,
5147 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5156 The name of the style is retained,
5157 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5158 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5159 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5162 \begin_layout Section
5163 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5164 \begin_inset Index idx
5169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5171 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5188 \begin_layout Subsection
5190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5192 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5199 \begin_layout Standard
5200 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5201 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5204 \begin_layout Standard
5205 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5206 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5207 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5208 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5212 paragraph of a section,
5223 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5224 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5226 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5229 \begin_layout Standard
5230 The space between paragraphs,
5231 like the line spacing,
5232 the space between headings and text —
5234 all the spacing for just about everything —
5235 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5238 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5242 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5245 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5246 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5253 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5254 goes to produce a printable file.
5260 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5262 gives you the ability globally to change
5266 these pre-coded spacings.
5267 We will explain more later.
5270 \begin_layout Subsection
5271 Paragraph Separation
5272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5274 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5279 \begin_inset Index idx
5284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5303 \begin_layout Standard
5311 \begin_inset space ~
5319 \begin_inset space ~
5326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5330 \begin_inset Index idx
5335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5337 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5351 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5355 \begin_layout Subsection
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5363 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5365 \begin_inset space ~
5370 dialog and toggle the
5373 \begin_inset space ~
5378 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5381 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5385 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5386 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5389 \begin_layout Standard
5390 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5393 \begin_layout Subsection
5395 \begin_inset Index idx
5400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5402 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5419 \begin_layout Standard
5422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5426 \begin_inset Index idx
5431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5433 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5450 \begin_inset space ~
5459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5460 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5466 \begin_inset Index idx
5471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5474 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5488 installed to use this feature.
5493 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5495 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5497 \begin_inset space ~
5502 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
5505 \begin_layout Section
5506 Paragraph Environments
5507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5509 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5514 \begin_inset Index idx
5519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5521 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5536 \begin_inset Index idx
5541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5542 Paragraph environments
5550 \begin_layout Subsection
5554 \begin_layout Standard
5555 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5558 \begin_layout Standard
5567 } \SpecialChar ldots
5577 \begin_inset Newline newline
5580 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5582 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5584 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
5585 we urge you to read the
5594 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5597 \begin_layout Standard
5598 A paragraph environment is simply a
5599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5606 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5607 This can include a particular style of font,
5614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5621 the different environments inside one another,
5622 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
5623 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
5624 on the fly margin adjustment,
5625 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
5626 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
5627 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5630 \begin_layout Standard
5631 To choose a new paragraph environment,
5632 use the pull-down box
5633 \begin_inset Graphics
5634 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5640 at the left end of the toolbar.
5642 will change the environment of the
5646 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5647 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
5650 \begin_layout Standard
5659 create a new paragraph using the
5663 paragraph environment.
5665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5672 because if you are in one of these environments:
5675 \begin_layout Itemize
5681 \begin_layout Itemize
5687 \begin_layout Itemize
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 \begin_layout Itemize
5705 \begin_layout Itemize
5711 \begin_layout Itemize
5717 \begin_layout Standard
5719 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5724 rather than resetting it to
5729 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5730 \begin_inset space ~
5734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5736 reference "sec:Nesting"
5744 \begin_layout Subsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The default paragraph environment is
5754 It creates a plain paragraph.
5756 resets the paragraph environment,
5757 this is the one it chooses.
5759 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
5766 \begin_layout Standard
5767 You can nest a paragraph using the
5771 environment in just about anything else,
5772 but you can't really nest anything in a
5779 \begin_layout Subsection
5781 \begin_inset Index idx
5786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5788 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5805 \begin_layout Standard
5806 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5807 title page has three parts:
5809 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
5810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5817 for thanks or contact information.
5818 For certain types of documents,
5820 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
5821 For other types of documents,
5823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5830 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5833 \begin_layout Standard
5835 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
5850 Here's how you use them:
5853 \begin_layout Itemize
5854 Put the title of your document in the
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5862 Put the author name in the
5869 \begin_layout Itemize
5870 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
5871 want to use a fixed date,
5872 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
5873 put that text in the
5878 Note that using this environment is optional.
5879 If you don't provide any,
5881 will automatically insert today's date.
5882 If you don't want a date,
5885 Suppress default date on front page
5889 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5890 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5892 \begin_inset space ~
5900 \begin_layout Standard
5901 You can use footnotes to insert
5902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5909 or contact information.
5912 \begin_layout Subsection
5914 \begin_inset Index idx
5919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5928 name "subsec:Headings"
5935 \begin_layout Standard
5936 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5938 takes care of the numbering for you.
5941 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5943 \begin_inset Index idx
5948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5950 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5968 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5972 \begin_layout Enumerate
5978 \begin_layout Enumerate
5984 \begin_layout Enumerate
5990 \begin_layout Enumerate
5996 \begin_layout Enumerate
6002 \begin_layout Enumerate
6008 \begin_layout Enumerate
6014 \begin_layout Standard
6016 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6017 separated by periods.
6018 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6019 Unlike the other headings,
6020 parts are numbered with Roman numerals.
6023 \begin_layout Standard
6024 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6026 suppose you're writing a book.
6027 You group the book into chapters.
6029 does a similar grouping:
6032 \begin_layout Itemize
6037 is divided into either
6048 \begin_layout Itemize
6060 \begin_layout Itemize
6072 \begin_layout Itemize
6084 \begin_layout Itemize
6096 \begin_layout Itemize
6108 \begin_layout Standard
6109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6118 Not all document types use the
6122 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6127 is the top-level heading.
6135 \begin_layout Standard
6141 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6143 labels it with its number,
6144 along with the number of the subsection,
6147 chapter that it's in.
6149 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6162 \begin_inset Index idx
6167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6169 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6186 \begin_layout Standard
6187 The unnumbered section headings have a
6188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6195 at the end of their name.
6196 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6198 \begin_inset space ~
6202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6213 Changing the Numbering
6214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6216 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6223 \begin_layout Standard
6224 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6226 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6227 that's preset in the document class.
6228 Just as certain classes start with
6243 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6253 This is something you can change.
6256 \begin_layout Standard
6259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset Index idx
6268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6270 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6287 \begin_inset space ~
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6296 you will see two counters.
6301 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6302 numbers a section heading.
6303 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6307 Short Titles of Headings
6308 \begin_inset Index idx
6313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6315 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6330 \begin_inset Argument 1
6333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6342 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6349 \begin_layout Standard
6350 Some section or chapter titles,
6353 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6355 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6356 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6364 To specify a short title,
6365 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6369 \begin_inset space ~
6375 This will insert a box labeled
6376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6380 \begin_inset space ~
6384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6388 This also works for captions inside floats.
6389 There can only be one short title per title.
6392 \begin_layout Standard
6393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6400 \begin_layout Standard
6401 The following information applies to all section headings:
6404 \begin_layout Itemize
6405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6408 \begin_layout Itemize
6409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6412 \begin_layout Itemize
6413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6416 \begin_layout Itemize
6417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6420 \begin_layout Subsection
6424 \begin_layout Standard
6426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6442 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6443 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6444 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6445 They also allow nesting,
6455 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6458 \begin_layout Standard
6459 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6468 when you start a new paragraph.
6470 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6474 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6477 once you are done typing in that poem,
6478 you have to change back to the
6482 environment yourself.
6485 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6494 \begin_inset Index idx
6499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6508 \begin_layout Standard
6509 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
6510 it's time for the differences.
6519 are identical except for one difference:
6524 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6533 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6537 Here's an example of the
6551 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
6552 See – no indentation!
6556 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6558 there's no indentation,
6559 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
6562 \begin_layout Standard
6563 Here's another example,
6571 \begin_layout Quotation
6578 you will see the indentation.
6579 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
6584 is the environment for you!
6590 you were quoting other text.
6593 \begin_layout Quotation
6594 Here's a new paragraph.
6595 I could ramble on and on,
6596 like a politician at election time.
6602 \begin_layout Standard
6603 As the examples show,
6608 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6609 They should put quotes in the
6614 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6618 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6621 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6623 \begin_inset Index idx
6628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6645 \begin_inset Index idx
6650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6657 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6666 \begin_layout Standard
6671 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
6680 \begin_inset Newline newline
6683 Which I did not rehearse!
6687 It could be much worse.
6688 This line could be long,
6691 so very long that it wraps around.
6692 It looks okay on screen,
6693 but in the printed version,
6694 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
6696 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6702 \begin_inset Newline newline
6705 And make things look fine
6706 \begin_inset Newline newline
6712 arg "newline-insert newline"
6718 \begin_layout Standard
6724 does not indent both margins.
6725 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6726 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
6730 arg "newline-insert newline"
6736 \begin_layout Subsection
6738 \begin_inset Index idx
6743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6759 \begin_layout Standard
6761 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
6772 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
6784 lets you provide your own label.
6785 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
6788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6793 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
6796 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6805 reset the environment to
6809 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6810 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6811 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
6815 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6819 If you do this at the top level of a list,
6820 it returns you to the
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6828 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6831 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
6832 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
6833 we suggest you read all of section
6834 \begin_inset space ~
6838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6840 reference "sec:Nesting"
6848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6850 \begin_inset Index idx
6855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6857 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6881 \begin_layout Standard
6882 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6886 paragraph environment.
6887 It has the following properties:
6890 \begin_layout Itemize
6891 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6895 \begin_layout Itemize
6897 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6900 \begin_layout Itemize
6901 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6905 \begin_layout Itemize
6906 The items can have any length.
6908 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6909 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6916 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 environment inside another
6926 the label changes to a new symbol.
6930 \begin_layout Itemize
6931 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6934 \begin_layout Itemize
6936 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6939 \begin_layout Itemize
6941 \begin_inset space ~
6945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6947 reference "sec:Nesting"
6952 for a full explanation of nesting.
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6958 that explanation was also an example of an
6967 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6970 \begin_layout Standard
6971 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6972 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6975 \begin_layout Itemize
6976 The label for the first level
6980 is a large black dot,
6985 \begin_layout Itemize
6986 The label for the second level is a dash.
6990 \begin_layout Itemize
6991 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6995 \begin_layout Itemize
6996 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7000 \begin_layout Itemize
7001 Back out to the third level.
7005 \begin_layout Itemize
7006 Back to the second level.
7010 \begin_layout Itemize
7011 Back to the outermost level.
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 These are the default labels for an
7020 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7025 dialog in the submenu
7030 \begin_inset Index idx
7035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7051 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7055 \begin_layout Standard
7056 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7057 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7058 \begin_inset space ~
7062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7064 reference "sec:Nesting"
7072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7074 \begin_inset Index idx
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7081 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7096 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7098 name "sec:Enumerate"
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7110 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7111 It has these properties:
7114 \begin_layout Enumerate
7115 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7119 \begin_layout Enumerate
7120 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7124 \begin_layout Enumerate
7126 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7129 \begin_layout Enumerate
7134 environment resets the counter to one.
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7152 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7153 Items can have any length.
7156 \begin_layout Enumerate
7157 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7160 \begin_layout Enumerate
7161 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7164 \begin_layout Enumerate
7165 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7169 \begin_layout Standard
7179 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7181 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7182 labels the four different levels in an
7189 \begin_layout Enumerate
7190 The first level of an
7194 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7198 \begin_layout Enumerate
7199 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7203 \begin_layout Enumerate
7204 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7208 \begin_layout Enumerate
7209 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7212 \begin_layout Enumerate
7214 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7218 \begin_layout Enumerate
7219 Back to the third level
7223 \begin_layout Enumerate
7224 Back to the second level.
7228 \begin_layout Enumerate
7229 Back to the outermost level.
7232 \begin_layout Standard
7233 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7239 \begin_inset space ~
7243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7245 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7251 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7252 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7256 \begin_layout Standard
7257 There is more to nesting
7261 environments than we've stated here.
7262 You should read section
7263 \begin_inset space ~
7267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7269 reference "sec:Nesting"
7274 to learn more about nesting.
7277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7279 \begin_inset Index idx
7284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Standard
7304 Unlike the previous two environments,
7309 list has no fixed label.
7313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7320 of the first line as the label.
7324 \begin_layout Description
7326 This is an example of the
7333 \begin_layout Standard
7335 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7347 it is meant that the first usage of the
7351 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7352 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7360 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7366 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7368 \begin_inset space ~
7375 \begin_inset space ~
7379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7381 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7386 for more information.) Here is an example:
7389 \begin_layout Description
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7395 This one shows how to use a
7398 \begin_inset space ~
7410 \begin_layout Description
7416 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7417 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7418 It's not a good idea to use a
7422 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7423 You're better off using
7435 paragraphs into them.
7438 \begin_layout Description
7444 environments inside one another,
7445 nest them in other types of lists,
7449 \begin_layout Standard
7450 Notice that after the first line,
7452 indents subsequent lines,
7453 offsetting them from the first line.
7456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7458 \begin_inset Index idx
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7487 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7488 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7492 \begin_layout Standard
7501 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
7502 Here are its properties:
7505 \begin_layout Labeling
7506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7508 \begin_inset space ~
7511 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7520 of each line as the item label.
7525 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7526 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
7527 use a non-breaking space as described above.
7530 \begin_layout Labeling
7531 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7532 margins As you can see,
7534 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
7535 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
7536 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
7539 \begin_layout Labeling
7540 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7542 \begin_inset space ~
7545 width \SpecialChar LyX
7546 uses the width of the label,
7547 or the default width,
7549 If the label width is larger,
7551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7558 into the first line.
7560 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
7563 \begin_layout Labeling
7564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7566 \begin_inset space ~
7569 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
7573 environment has the same left margin.
7574 \begin_inset Newline newline
7577 To change the default width,
7578 select all items in the list.
7581 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7583 \begin_inset space ~
7588 dialog (toolbar button
7591 arg "layout-paragraph"
7598 \begin_inset space ~
7603 determines the default label width.
7604 You can use the text of your largest label here,
7605 but you can also use the letter
7606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7613 multiple times instead.
7614 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7624 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7627 \begin_inset space ~
7632 every time you alter a label in a
7637 \begin_inset Newline newline
7640 The predefined default width is the length of
7641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7649 \begin_inset space ~
7655 \begin_layout Standard
7660 list the same way as the
7665 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
7670 environment gives you another way to do this,
7671 using a different overall layout.
7674 \begin_layout Standard
7679 lists inside one another,
7680 nest them in other types of lists,
7682 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7684 \begin_inset space ~
7688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7690 reference "sec:Nesting"
7695 to learn about nesting.
7698 \begin_layout Standard
7699 There is yet another feature of the
7704 As you can see in the examples,
7706 left-justifies the item labels by default.
7707 You can use additional
7711 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7712 justifies the item label.
7717 are documented in section
7718 \begin_inset space ~
7722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7724 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7730 Here are some examples:
7733 \begin_layout Labeling
7734 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7735 Left The default for
7742 \begin_layout Labeling
7743 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7744 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7751 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7754 \begin_layout Labeling
7755 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7756 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7760 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7767 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7770 \begin_layout Subsection
7772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7774 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7779 \begin_inset Index idx
7784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7804 The features described in this section require that the module
7806 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7808 is loaded in the document settings.
7809 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7815 \begin_inset Index idx
7820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7823 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7841 Custom Enumerate Lists
7842 \begin_inset Index idx
7847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7859 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7876 \begin_layout Standard
7878 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
7880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7883 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7884 There you add the command
7887 \begin_layout Standard
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7908 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7911 \begin_inset space ~
7915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7917 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7931 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7938 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7939 For capital Roman numerals replace
7951 in the command above.
7952 For Arabic numerals use
7960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7967 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7983 \begin_layout Standard
7985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 You can only number 26
7995 \begin_inset space ~
7998 items with Latin letters,
7999 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8007 \begin_layout Standard
8008 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8009 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8015 \begin_layout Standard
8016 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8019 \begin_layout Enumerate
8020 \begin_inset Argument 1
8023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8049 \begin_layout Enumerate
8050 \begin_inset Argument 1
8053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8076 \begin_layout Enumerate
8081 \begin_layout Enumerate
8082 \begin_inset Argument 1
8085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8109 \begin_layout Enumerate
8110 \begin_inset Argument 1
8113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8139 \begin_layout Standard
8140 For this list these commands were used:
8143 \begin_layout Standard
8154 \begin_inset Newline newline
8162 \begin_inset Newline newline
8170 \begin_inset Newline newline
8180 \begin_layout Standard
8187 makes the label emphasized and
8196 \begin_layout Standard
8197 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8206 When you change the label of a list level,
8207 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8217 \begin_inset Index idx
8222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8224 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8234 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8251 \begin_layout Standard
8252 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8255 \begin_layout Enumerate
8256 \begin_inset Argument 1
8259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8278 \begin_inset Note Note
8281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8282 goes back to default numbering
8290 \begin_layout Enumerate
8294 \begin_layout Standard
8298 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8302 \begin_layout Standard
8303 To resume an enumeration,
8312 \begin_layout Standard
8313 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8322 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8323 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8333 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8334 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8335 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8340 \begin_layout Standard
8346 \begin_layout Standard
8351 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8355 \begin_layout Enumerate
8359 \begin_layout Enumerate
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8364 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8367 \begin_layout Enumerate
8368 \begin_inset Argument 1
8371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8387 This enumeration starts at 4
8390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8392 \begin_inset Index idx
8397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8399 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8416 \begin_layout Standard
8417 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8418 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8421 \begin_layout Itemize
8425 \begin_layout Itemize
8426 with standard spacing
8429 \begin_layout Standard
8430 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8431 Add there the command
8435 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8438 \begin_layout Itemize
8439 \begin_inset Argument 1
8442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8461 \begin_layout Itemize
8465 \begin_layout Itemize
8469 \begin_layout Standard
8470 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8476 \begin_inset Index idx
8481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8484 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8499 For more information see its documentation,
8501 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8512 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
8513 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
8514 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8517 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
8520 \begin_layout Enumerate
8521 \begin_inset Argument 1
8524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8546 \begin_layout Enumerate
8547 with negative indentation
8550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8551 Further Customization
8552 \begin_inset Index idx
8557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8559 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8576 \begin_layout Standard
8577 You can also change the style of description lists.
8581 \begin_layout Standard
8587 \begin_layout Standard
8588 changes the description label font,
8592 \begin_layout Standard
8598 \begin_layout Standard
8599 sets the list style.
8602 \begin_layout Standard
8603 An example where the command
8606 \begin_layout Standard
8615 \begin_layout Standard
8619 \begin_layout Description
8621 \begin_inset space ~
8626 \begin_inset Argument 1
8629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8650 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
8651 therefore ionizing them.
8654 \begin_layout Description
8656 \begin_inset space ~
8660 In computer science,
8661 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
8663 or handles to a resource such as an object,
8665 disk space or other resource.
8668 \begin_layout Standard
8669 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8675 \begin_inset Index idx
8680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8683 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8698 For more information see its documentation
8699 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8709 \begin_layout Subsection
8711 \begin_inset Index idx
8716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8725 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8727 \begin_inset space ~
8734 \begin_layout Standard
8735 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8736 has document classes for letters,
8737 we've also created two paragraph environments called
8744 \begin_inset space ~
8750 To use the letter class,
8751 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
8752 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8753 gags on the document.
8762 \begin_inset space ~
8767 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8768 You can even nest them inside other environments,
8769 though you can't nest anything in them.
8772 \begin_layout Standard
8774 you're not limited to using
8781 \begin_inset space ~
8790 \begin_inset space ~
8797 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
8800 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8804 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8811 \begin_layout Standard
8816 environment formats text in the style of an address,
8817 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
8822 \begin_inset space ~
8827 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
8828 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8829 Here's an example of each:
8832 \begin_layout Right Address
8834 \begin_inset Newline newline
8838 \begin_inset Newline newline
8842 \begin_inset Newline newline
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8853 \begin_inset space ~
8859 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
8860 which \SpecialChar LyX
8861 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
8862 Here's an example of the
8869 \begin_layout Address
8871 \begin_inset Newline newline
8874 Where do I send this
8875 \begin_inset Newline newline
8878 Your post office and country
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8890 \begin_inset space ~
8895 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8900 in either of these environments,
8902 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
8917 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8926 arg "newline-insert newline"
8931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8932 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8934 \begin_inset space ~
8938 \begin_inset space ~
8943 ) to start a new line in an
8950 \begin_inset space ~
8958 \begin_layout Subsection
8962 \begin_layout Standard
8963 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
8965 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8970 \begin_inset Index idx
8975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8984 \begin_layout Standard
8989 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8991 you could use this environment anywhere,
8992 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
8995 don't bother trying to nest
8999 in anything else or vice versa.
9005 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9006 The book document classes ignores the
9011 and it's utterly silly to use
9015 in a letter document class.
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9023 environment does several things for you.
9025 it puts the centered label
9026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9034 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9036 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9037 just as you'd expect.
9039 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9041 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9043 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9046 \begin_layout Standard
9047 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9051 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9052 The new paragraph will still be in the
9058 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9062 \begin_inset Float figure
9069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9071 \begin_inset Graphics
9072 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9080 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9085 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9106 \begin_layout Standard
9107 We would love to demonstrate the
9112 but since this document is in the
9113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9122 We inserted it therefore as figure
9123 \begin_inset space ~
9127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9129 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9135 If you have never heard of an
9136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9144 you can safely ignore this environment.
9147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9149 \begin_inset Index idx
9154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9163 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9170 \begin_layout Standard
9175 environment is used to list references.
9177 you could use this environment anywhere,
9178 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9190 \begin_layout Standard
9191 When you first open a
9197 adds a large vertical space,
9198 followed by the heading
9199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9214 depending on the document class.
9215 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9216 Each paragraph of the
9220 environment is a bibliography entry.
9226 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9227 Each new paragraph is still in the
9234 \begin_layout Standard
9236 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9238 For more information on that,
9239 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9240 's bibliography handling,
9241 have a look at section
9242 \begin_inset space ~
9246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9248 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9256 \begin_layout Subsection
9257 Special Environments
9260 \begin_layout Standard
9262 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9270 \begin_inset Index idx
9275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9285 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9298 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9300 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9305 key as a fixed whitespace.
9309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9323 \begin_inset space ~
9328 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9347 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9349 If you need to insert blank lines,
9350 you will still need to use
9353 arg "newline-insert newline"
9372 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9374 when you finish using the
9380 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9387 environment inside of others.
9390 \begin_layout Standard
9391 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9394 \begin_layout Itemize
9398 arg "newline-insert newline"
9401 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9406 \begin_inset space \space{}
9416 arg "newline-insert newline"
9422 \begin_layout Itemize
9426 arg "newline-insert newline"
9436 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
9442 \begin_layout Itemize
9443 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
9444 You must put at least one
9448 in any line you want blank.
9454 \begin_layout Itemize
9455 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
9459 since that will insert
9464 You get the typewriter double quotes with
9467 arg "self-insert \""
9473 \begin_layout Standard
9477 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9481 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9485 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9489 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9493 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9494 printf("Hello World!
9499 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9503 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9507 \begin_layout Standard
9508 This is just the standard
9509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9519 \begin_layout Standard
9527 such as program source,
9528 shell scripts and so on.
9529 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
9530 \begin_inset Index idx
9535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9536 Paragraph environments
9541 For longer parts of programming code,
9542 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
9544 Program Code Listings
9549 \begin_inset space ~
9557 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9561 \begin_inset Index idx
9566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9575 \begin_layout Standard
9580 environment is similar to the
9585 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
9590 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
9604 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a non-breaking space) and you can have empty lines.
9618 \begin_layout Itemize
9619 have a certain language and a text style
9622 \begin_layout Itemize
9625 foot- and margin notes,
9629 index- and nomenclature entries,
9634 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
9638 \begin_layout Standard
9639 Because of these properties
9643 works like a typewriter.
9647 \begin_layout Verbatim
9651 \begin_layout Verbatim
9654 The following 2 lines are empty:
9657 \begin_layout Verbatim
9661 \begin_layout Verbatim
9665 \begin_layout Verbatim
9666 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9671 \begin_layout Standard
9676 environment is identical to
9680 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9681 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9688 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9692 \begin_layout Section
9693 Nesting Environments
9694 \begin_inset Index idx
9699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9701 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9725 \begin_layout Subsection
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9731 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
9732 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
9733 For example you have three main points in an outline,
9734 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
9736 you have a list inside of another list,
9738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9748 \begin_layout Enumerate
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9761 \begin_layout Enumerate
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9770 \begin_layout Standard
9771 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9772 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
9775 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9777 \begin_inset space ~
9781 \begin_inset space ~
9789 \begin_inset space ~
9793 \begin_inset space ~
9798 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
9799 Instead of the menu,
9800 you can also use the toolbar buttons
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9809 arg "depth-decrement"
9823 arg "depth-increment"
9829 arg "depth-decrement"
9833 The change will work on the current selection,
9834 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
9835 or the current paragraph.
9838 \begin_layout Standard
9839 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9840 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9841 If it is invalid to do so,
9842 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9844 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
9845 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9848 \begin_layout Standard
9849 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9852 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
9853 as you're about to find out.
9854 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9857 \begin_layout Subsection
9858 What You Can and Can't Nest
9861 \begin_layout Standard
9862 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
9863 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9866 \begin_layout Standard
9867 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
9868 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9871 \begin_layout Itemize
9872 Completely unnestable
9875 \begin_layout Itemize
9877 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
9880 \begin_layout Itemize
9882 you can nest them into other environments,
9883 but you can't nest anything into them.
9886 \begin_layout Standard
9887 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
9888 and which paragraph environments have them:
9891 \begin_layout Description
9892 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9893 Can't nest into them.
9897 \begin_layout Itemize
9903 \begin_layout Itemize
9909 \begin_layout Itemize
9915 \begin_layout Itemize
9921 \begin_layout Itemize
9928 \begin_layout Description
9930 \begin_inset space ~
9933 Nestable You can nest them.
9934 You can nest other things into them.
9938 \begin_layout Itemize
9944 \begin_layout Itemize
9950 \begin_layout Itemize
9956 \begin_layout Itemize
9962 \begin_layout Itemize
9968 \begin_layout Itemize
9974 \begin_layout Itemize
9980 \begin_layout Itemize
9987 \begin_layout Itemize
9993 \begin_layout Itemize
10000 \begin_layout Description
10001 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10002 You can't nest anything into them.
10006 \begin_layout Itemize
10012 \begin_layout Itemize
10018 \begin_layout Itemize
10024 \begin_layout Itemize
10030 \begin_layout Itemize
10036 \begin_layout Itemize
10042 \begin_layout Itemize
10048 \begin_layout Itemize
10054 \begin_layout Itemize
10060 \begin_layout Itemize
10066 \begin_layout Itemize
10072 \begin_layout Itemize
10078 \begin_layout Itemize
10084 \begin_layout Itemize
10088 \begin_inset space ~
10094 \begin_layout Itemize
10101 \begin_layout Standard
10102 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10111 Although it is possible,
10113 to nest numbered section headings like
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10128 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10136 \begin_layout Subsection
10137 Nesting Other Things:
10142 \begin_inset Index idx
10147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10149 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10166 \begin_layout Standard
10167 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10168 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10172 \begin_layout Itemize
10176 \begin_layout Itemize
10180 \begin_layout Itemize
10184 \begin_layout Standard
10186 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10195 Figures and tables in
10199 are not affected by this.
10204 Have a look at section
10205 \begin_inset space ~
10209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10211 reference "sec:Floats"
10216 for more information about
10223 \begin_layout Standard
10225 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10228 or an equation is inline,
10229 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10232 \begin_layout Standard
10234 if you have an equation,
10235 figure or table in a
10236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10244 it behaves just like a
10245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10252 paragraph environment.
10253 You can nest it into any environment,
10254 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10257 \begin_layout Standard
10258 Here's an example with a table:
10261 \begin_layout Enumerate
10266 \begin_layout Enumerate
10267 This is (a) and it's nested.
10271 \begin_layout Standard
10272 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10278 \begin_layout Standard
10280 \begin_inset Tabular
10281 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10282 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10283 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10284 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10368 \begin_layout Standard
10369 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10376 \begin_layout Enumerate
10378 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10382 \begin_layout Enumerate
10386 \begin_layout Standard
10387 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10388 the list would look like this:
10391 \begin_layout Enumerate
10396 \begin_layout Enumerate
10397 This is (a) and it's nested.
10401 \begin_layout Standard
10402 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10408 \begin_layout Standard
10410 \begin_inset Tabular
10411 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10412 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10414 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10498 \begin_layout Standard
10499 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10505 \begin_layout Enumerate
10513 it's not nested at all.
10516 \begin_layout Enumerate
10520 \begin_layout Standard
10521 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
10522 but is also the first item of a new list!
10525 \begin_layout Standard
10526 There's another trap you can fall into:
10528 but not going deep enough.
10530 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
10533 \begin_layout Enumerate
10538 \begin_layout Enumerate
10539 This is (a) and it's nested.
10542 \begin_layout Standard
10543 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10549 \begin_layout Standard
10551 \begin_inset Tabular
10552 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10553 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10554 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10640 \begin_layout Standard
10641 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10647 \begin_layout Enumerate
10649 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
10657 \begin_layout Enumerate
10661 \begin_layout Standard
10663 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
10669 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
10671 if you nest tables,
10672 figures or equations,
10673 make sure you go to the right depth!
10676 \begin_layout Subsection
10677 Usage and General Features
10680 \begin_layout Standard
10681 Speaking of levels,
10683 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
10686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10693 is the innermost possible depth.
10694 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
10697 \begin_layout Enumerate
10698 level #1 – outermost
10702 \begin_layout Enumerate
10707 \begin_layout Enumerate
10712 \begin_layout Enumerate
10717 \begin_layout Itemize
10722 \begin_layout Itemize
10731 \begin_layout Standard
10732 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
10733 and you can see both of them in the example.
10734 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
10735 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
10745 if we tried to nest another
10750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10758 we would get errors.
10761 \begin_layout Subsection
10763 \begin_inset Index idx
10768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10770 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10787 \begin_layout Standard
10788 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10789 We have several examples of nested environments.
10791 we explain how we created the example,
10792 so that you can reproduce them.
10795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10797 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10800 \begin_layout Labeling
10801 \labelwidthstring MMM
10802 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10811 \begin_layout Labeling
10812 \labelwidthstring MMM
10813 #2-a This is level #2.
10814 We created it by using
10817 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10823 arg "depth-increment"
10830 \begin_layout Labeling
10831 \labelwidthstring MMM
10832 #3-a This is level #3.
10842 arg "depth-increment"
10846 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10850 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10856 arg "depth-increment"
10863 \begin_layout Standard
10870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10880 We did this by entering
10883 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10890 arg "depth-increment"
10894 then changing the paragraph environment to
10899 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
10900 it also works for the
10917 \begin_layout Standard
10927 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10933 \begin_layout Labeling
10934 \labelwidthstring MMM
10935 #4-a This is level #4.
10939 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10942 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10948 we can't nest anything inside a
10953 which is why we're still at level #4.
10959 keep nesting things inside
10960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10971 \begin_layout Labeling
10972 \labelwidthstring MMM
10973 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10978 \begin_layout Labeling
10979 \labelwidthstring MMM
10980 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10981 and this is level #6.
10983 you should know how we made these two.
10987 \begin_layout Labeling
10988 \labelwidthstring MMM
10989 #5-b Back to level #5.
10993 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10999 arg "depth-decrement"
11006 \begin_layout Labeling
11007 \labelwidthstring MMM
11011 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11017 arg "depth-decrement"
11021 we're back at level #4.
11025 \begin_layout Labeling
11026 \labelwidthstring MMM
11027 #3-b Back to level #3.
11028 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11032 \begin_layout Labeling
11033 \labelwidthstring MMM
11034 #2-b Back to level #2.
11038 \begin_layout Labeling
11039 \labelwidthstring MMM
11041 back to the outermost level,
11043 After this sentence,
11048 and change the paragraph environment back to
11055 \begin_layout Standard
11056 We could have also used the
11075 environment in place of the
11080 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11083 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11088 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11089 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11094 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11104 arg "depth-increment"
11109 \begin_inset Newline newline
11113 we will change to the
11121 \begin_layout Enumerate
11130 \begin_layout Enumerate
11131 Notice how the nested
11135 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11140 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11144 \begin_layout Standard
11145 We ended this example by entering
11151 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11155 and reset the nesting depth by using
11158 arg "depth-decrement"
11164 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11177 \begin_inset Argument 1
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 Levels and other list environments
11191 \begin_layout Enumerate
11197 paragraph environment.
11198 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11202 \begin_layout Enumerate
11207 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11213 arg "depth-increment"
11218 what happens if we nest an
11222 environment inside of this one?
11223 It will be at level #3,
11224 but what will its label be?
11229 \begin_layout Itemize
11241 even though it's at level #3.
11243 its label is a bullet.
11244 (We got here by using
11247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11254 arg "depth-increment"
11258 then changing the environment to
11266 \begin_layout Itemize
11271 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11278 arg "depth-increment"
11282 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11287 \begin_layout Enumerate
11289 to get to level #5.
11292 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11297 Notice the type of numbering,
11303 because we are in the
11311 environment (that is,
11327 \begin_layout Enumerate
11332 change the paragraph environment,
11333 but decrease the nesting depth?
11334 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11338 \begin_layout Enumerate
11340 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11344 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11347 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11350 \begin_layout Enumerate
11354 arg "depth-decrement"
11357 to decrease the depth after the next
11360 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11367 \begin_layout Enumerate
11369 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11374 \begin_layout Enumerate
11376 Even though we've changed levels,
11378 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11381 \begin_layout Enumerate
11383 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11395 that \SpecialChar LyX
11400 reset the counter for the label.
11404 \begin_layout Enumerate
11408 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11414 arg "depth-decrement"
11418 and we're back to level #2.
11420 we not only changed the nesting depth,
11421 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
11429 \begin_layout Enumerate
11430 The same thing happens if we do another
11433 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11439 arg "depth-decrement"
11442 sequence and return to level #1,
11443 the outermost level.
11446 \begin_layout Standard
11448 we reset the environment to
11454 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
11464 The number of other
11468 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
11474 The same rule applies for the
11482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11487 \begin_layout Enumerate
11488 We're going to go totally nuts now.
11489 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
11490 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
11500 \begin_layout Standard
11509 arg "depth-increment"
11518 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
11520 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
11521 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
11522 Either before or after this,
11523 we will put in the level.
11527 \begin_layout Enumerate
11534 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
11538 \begin_layout Verse
11539 Now we will add verse.
11540 \begin_inset Newline newline
11543 It will get much worse.
11544 \begin_inset Newline newline
11555 arg "depth-increment"
11567 \begin_layout Verse
11570 \begin_inset Newline newline
11573 Bippitey boppitey boo!
11574 \begin_inset Newline newline
11580 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11588 \begin_layout Verse
11589 Here comes a table:
11593 \begin_layout Standard
11594 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11600 \begin_layout Standard
11602 \begin_inset Tabular
11603 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11604 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11605 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
11611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
11649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11691 \begin_layout Verse
11695 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11707 arg "depth-increment"
11714 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11721 \begin_inset Newline newline
11729 arg "depth-decrement"
11736 \begin_layout Enumerate
11743 level #1) This is another item.
11744 Note that selecting a
11748 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
11749 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
11756 \begin_layout Quotation
11757 We're now ending the
11761 list and changing to
11766 We're still at level #1.
11767 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11768 The next set of paragraphs is a
11769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11776 We will nest both the
11783 \begin_inset space ~
11788 environments inside of this one,
11789 then use another nested
11793 for the letter body.
11797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11800 to preserve the depth.
11801 Remember that you need to use
11804 arg "newline-insert newline"
11807 to create multiple lines inside the
11814 \begin_inset space ~
11824 \begin_layout Right Address
11826 \begin_inset Newline newline
11831 \begin_inset Newline newline
11837 \begin_layout Address
11839 \begin_inset space ~
11845 \begin_layout Quotation
11846 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11850 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11852 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
11853 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
11854 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
11856 we thank you for your patience.
11859 \begin_layout Quotation
11862 now have a special on beef.
11863 If you are interested,
11864 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
11865 along with payment.
11868 \begin_layout Quotation
11869 We thank you again for your patience.
11872 \begin_layout Address
11874 \begin_inset Newline newline
11881 \begin_layout Quotation
11882 That ends that example!
11885 \begin_layout Standard
11887 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11888 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
11889 We could have easily nested an
11911 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11914 \begin_layout Subsection
11916 \begin_inset Index idx
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11923 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11940 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11947 \begin_layout Standard
11948 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
11949 For example you need two different enumerations:
11952 \begin_layout Enumerate
11957 \begin_layout Enumerate
11962 \begin_layout Enumerate
11966 \begin_layout Standard
11967 \begin_inset Separator plain
11973 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 \begin_layout Standard
11980 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11986 \begin_layout Enumerate
11990 \begin_layout Enumerate
11994 \begin_layout Enumerate
11998 \begin_layout Standard
11999 To split an existing list into two lists,
12000 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12003 Separated <Name> Above
12007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12008 Separated <Name> Below
12011 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12012 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12013 Inside nested environments,
12014 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12017 \begin_layout Standard
12018 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12019 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12024 you get an environment separator when you press
12027 arg "paragraph-break"
12034 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12037 \begin_layout Section
12039 Pagination and Line Breaks
12040 \begin_inset Index idx
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12054 \begin_layout Standard
12056 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12058 offers you more spaces:
12059 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12060 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12067 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12072 \begin_inset Index idx
12077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12079 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12096 \begin_layout Standard
12097 The non-breaking space:
12098 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12099 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12100 ) not to automatically break the line at that point.
12101 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12105 \begin_layout Quote
12106 Further documentation is given in section
12107 \begin_inset Newline newline
12111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12113 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12121 \begin_layout Standard
12123 it would be a good thing to put a non-breaking space between
12124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12138 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12148 A non-breaking space is set with
12150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12151 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12153 \begin_inset space ~
12161 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12167 \begin_layout Subsection
12169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12171 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12176 \begin_inset Index idx
12181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12183 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12200 \begin_layout Standard
12201 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 The length units are listed in Appendix
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12215 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12227 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12232 \begin_inset Index idx
12237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12239 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12256 \begin_layout Standard
12257 With the introduction of typewriters,
12258 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12259 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12260 automatically takes care about this.
12262 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12264 \begin_inset space ~
12268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12270 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12276 To insert a normal space,
12279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12280 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12282 \begin_inset space ~
12290 arg "space-insert normal"
12296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12297 Non-Breaking Thin Space
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12300 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12305 \begin_inset Index idx
12310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12312 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12329 \begin_layout Standard
12331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12334 non-breaking thin space
12335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12338 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12347 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
12349 inside abbreviations:
12352 \begin_layout Quote
12354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12358 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
12361 \begin_layout Standard
12362 or between values and units.
12363 Compare for example this:
12364 \begin_inset Newline newline
12368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12372 \begin_inset Newline newline
12375 10 kg (normal space)
12378 \begin_layout Standard
12379 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
12381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12382 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12384 \begin_inset space ~
12388 \begin_inset space ~
12396 arg "space-insert thin"
12402 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12406 \begin_layout Standard
12407 You can also insert the following space types:
12410 \begin_layout Description
12412 \begin_inset space ~
12415 space A line with a
12416 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12420 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
12424 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12427 medium space between the arrows.
12430 \begin_layout Description
12432 \begin_inset space ~
12435 space A line with a
12436 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12440 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
12444 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12447 thick space between the arrows.
12450 \begin_layout Description
12452 \begin_inset space ~
12456 \begin_inset space ~
12459 space A line with a
12460 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12464 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
12468 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12471 negative thin space between the arrows.
12474 \begin_layout Description
12476 \begin_inset space ~
12480 \begin_inset space ~
12483 space A line with a
12484 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12488 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
12492 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12495 negative medium space between the arrows.
12498 \begin_layout Description
12500 \begin_inset space ~
12504 \begin_inset space ~
12507 space A line with a
12508 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12512 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
12516 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12519 negative thick space between the arrows.
12522 \begin_layout Description
12524 \begin_inset space ~
12528 \begin_inset space ~
12532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12536 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12540 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
12544 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12548 \begin_inset space ~
12552 \begin_inset space ~
12556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12559 em) space between the arrows.
12562 \begin_layout Description
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12572 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12576 \begin_inset space \quad{}
12580 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12584 \begin_inset space ~
12588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12591 em) space between the arrows.
12594 \begin_layout Description
12596 \begin_inset space ~
12600 \begin_inset space ~
12604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12608 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12612 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
12616 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12620 \begin_inset space ~
12624 \begin_inset space ~
12628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12631 em) space between the arrows.
12634 \begin_layout Description
12636 \begin_inset space ~
12640 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12644 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
12649 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12653 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12656 cm space between the arrows.
12659 \begin_layout Standard
12661 \begin_inset space ~
12665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12667 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12672 lists the different space sizes.
12675 \begin_layout Standard
12676 \begin_inset Float table
12683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12684 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12689 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12693 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
12701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12703 \begin_inset Tabular
12704 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
12705 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12706 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12707 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
12709 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12761 Non-breaking Normal
12766 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12781 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12790 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12813 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12837 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12846 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12870 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12885 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12894 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12909 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12933 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12951 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12955 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12969 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12982 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13036 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13038 \begin_inset Index idx
13043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13045 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13062 \begin_layout Standard
13063 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13064 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13065 An Horizontal Fill is actually a variable length space,
13066 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13067 If there is more than one Horizontal Fill on a line,
13068 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13071 \begin_layout Standard
13072 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13075 \begin_layout Quote
13077 This is on the left side
13078 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13081 This is on the right
13084 \begin_layout Quote
13087 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13091 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13097 \begin_layout Quote
13100 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13104 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13108 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13114 \begin_layout Standard
13115 That was an example in the
13121 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13125 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13129 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13132 is one in a standard paragraph.
13133 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13138 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13141 \begin_layout Standard
13142 Horizontal Fills can be made visible when you choose one of the
13145 \begin_inset space ~
13150 s in the space dialog:
13151 The following patterns are available:
13154 \begin_layout Standard
13157 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13161 \begin_inset space ~
13167 \begin_layout Standard
13170 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13180 \begin_layout Standard
13183 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13187 \begin_inset space ~
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13196 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13200 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_layout Standard
13207 Down brace (= opened downwards):
13209 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13219 \begin_layout Standard
13220 Up brace (= opened upwards):
13222 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
13226 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_layout Standard
13233 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13242 If an Horizontal Fill is at the beginning of a line,
13247 in the first line in a paragraph,
13250 This prevents Horizontal Fills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
13251 If you need space in this case anyway,
13256 option in the space dialog.
13264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13268 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
13273 \begin_inset Index idx
13278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13280 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13297 \begin_layout Standard
13298 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
13300 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
13303 \begin_layout Standard
13304 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13307 What is correct English?:
13308 \begin_inset Newline newline
13312 \begin_inset Newline newline
13316 \begin_inset space ~
13319 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
13320 \begin_inset Newline newline
13324 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13335 \begin_inset Newline newline
13339 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
13342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13350 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
13356 \begin_layout Standard
13358 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
13359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13363 \begin_inset space ~
13367 \begin_inset space ~
13371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13376 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
13378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13379 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13383 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
13384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13388 \begin_inset space ~
13392 \begin_inset space ~
13396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13399 into the phantom inset (note the space after
13400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13408 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
13409 That is why it is named
13410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13418 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
13419 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
13422 \begin_layout Subsection
13424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13426 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
13431 \begin_inset Index idx
13436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13438 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13455 \begin_layout Standard
13456 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
13459 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13460 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13462 \begin_inset space ~
13468 There you find the following sizes:
13471 \begin_layout Standard
13485 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
13486 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
13491 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
13493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13494 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
13496 \begin_inset space ~
13502 \begin_inset Index idx
13507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13509 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13523 for the paragraph separation.
13524 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
13535 \begin_layout Standard
13544 equal to the height,
13545 or half the height,
13546 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
13549 \begin_layout Standard
13555 \begin_inset Index idx
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13576 is a variable space,
13577 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
13579 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
13584 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
13585 because the space between them is then maximal.
13595 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
13599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13604 s are described in section
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13611 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
13621 If there are several
13626 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
13627 You can therefore use
13631 s to center text on a page,
13632 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13640 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
13641 \begin_inset space ~
13645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13647 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
13655 \begin_layout Standard
13656 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13667 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
13668 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
13680 \begin_layout Subsection
13681 Paragraph Alignment
13682 \begin_inset Index idx
13687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13689 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13707 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
13709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13712 dialog (toolbar button
13715 arg "layout-paragraph"
13719 There are five possibilities:
13722 \begin_layout Itemize
13730 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
13736 \begin_layout Itemize
13744 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13750 \begin_layout Itemize
13758 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13764 \begin_layout Itemize
13772 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13778 \begin_layout Itemize
13786 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13792 \begin_layout Standard
13793 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
13794 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
13795 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
13796 and look like this:
13799 \begin_layout Standard
13801 This paragraph is right aligned,
13804 \begin_layout Standard
13806 this one is centered,
13809 \begin_layout Standard
13811 this one is left aligned.
13814 \begin_layout Subsection
13816 \begin_inset Index idx
13821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13823 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13840 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13847 \begin_layout Standard
13848 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13849 does the page breaks in your document,
13850 you can force a page break where you want one.
13851 Normally this will not be necessary,
13852 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13853 is good at page breaking.
13854 Only if you use a lot of
13860 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13863 \begin_layout Standard
13864 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13868 have to change the page breaking.
13871 \begin_layout Standard
13872 There are two types of page breaks:
13873 One that ends the page without any special action.
13874 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13877 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13879 \begin_inset space ~
13886 that is inserted via the menu
13888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13889 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13891 \begin_inset space ~
13897 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
13898 so that it fills out the complete page.
13899 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
13902 \begin_layout Standard
13903 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
13906 the wrong way to do it.
13908 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
13909 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13913 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13918 to learn more about
13925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13929 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13934 \begin_inset Index idx
13939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13941 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13958 \begin_layout Standard
13959 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
13960 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13961 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
13962 including unprocessed floats,
13963 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
13964 if necessary by adding pages.
13967 \begin_layout Standard
13968 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13971 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13973 \begin_inset space ~
13979 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
13980 you can use the menu
13982 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13983 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13985 \begin_inset space ~
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13994 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
13995 if necessary by adding a page.
13998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13999 Suppressing Page Breaks
14000 \begin_inset Index idx
14005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14007 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14024 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14031 \begin_layout Standard
14032 To discourage page break at a certain point you can use
14034 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14035 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14039 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14042 \begin_layout Subsection
14044 \begin_inset Index idx
14049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14058 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14065 \begin_layout Standard
14066 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14067 one simply breaks the line.
14068 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14071 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14073 \begin_inset space ~
14077 \begin_inset space ~
14085 arg "newline-insert newline"
14089 Another type that is inserted via the menu
14091 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14092 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14094 \begin_inset space ~
14098 \begin_inset space ~
14106 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
14109 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
14110 This is useful to avoid
14111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14118 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
14121 \begin_layout Standard
14122 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
14124 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
14125 is very good at line breaking.
14128 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
14130 in a poem or for an address (see sections
14131 \begin_inset space ~
14135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14137 reference "sec:Quote"
14144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14146 reference "sec:Verse"
14152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14154 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
14162 \begin_layout Subsection
14164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14166 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
14171 \begin_inset Index idx
14176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14185 \begin_layout Standard
14187 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14198 \begin_layout Standard
14202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14205 \begin_inset space ~
14210 you can insert horizontal lines.
14211 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
14212 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
14215 \begin_layout Standard
14217 \begin_inset CommandInset line
14228 \begin_layout Section
14229 Characters and Symbols
14232 \begin_layout Standard
14233 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
14234 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
14236 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
14238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14244 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
14249 for information on how this is done.
14252 \begin_layout Standard
14253 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
14258 dialog via the menu
14260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14261 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
14267 \begin_layout Standard
14268 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14277 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
14279 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
14287 \begin_layout Section
14288 Fonts and Text Styles
14289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14291 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
14298 \begin_layout Subsection
14300 \begin_inset Index idx
14305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14307 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14324 \begin_layout Standard
14325 There are two types of fonts:
14328 \begin_layout Description
14330 \begin_inset space ~
14334 \begin_inset Index idx
14339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14355 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
14356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14360 characters) in the font.
14361 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
14362 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
14363 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
14364 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
14365 \begin_inset Newline newline
14368 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
14369 But to achieve a better quality,
14370 many fonts define several font sizes.
14371 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
14372 \begin_inset Newline newline
14388 \begin_inset space ~
14396 \begin_layout Description
14398 \begin_inset space ~
14402 \begin_inset Index idx
14407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14409 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14424 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
14425 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
14427 they don't scale well,
14428 because in order to scale a glyph,
14429 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
14430 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
14431 In order to mitigate this effect,
14432 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14436 pixels high up to 34
14437 \begin_inset space ~
14440 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
14441 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
14442 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
14443 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
14445 \begin_inset Newline newline
14448 Bitmap fonts are named
14451 \begin_inset space ~
14456 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
14459 \begin_layout Standard
14460 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
14461 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
14462 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
14463 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
14466 \begin_layout Standard
14467 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
14468 look at its document properties.
14471 \begin_layout Standard
14472 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying text styles rather than specifying a particular font.
14474 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
14475 to emphasize text you use an
14476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14484 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
14486 In \SpecialChar LyX
14488 you do things based on contexts,
14489 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
14492 \begin_layout Subsection
14495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14497 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14504 \begin_layout Standard
14507 used its own fonts.
14509 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
14510 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14512 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14513 needs some extra information about the fonts,
14514 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
14515 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
14516 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
14517 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
14518 files are very portable across different machines.
14520 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
14521 has increased a lot in the meantime;
14522 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
14524 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
14525 \begin_inset space ~
14529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14531 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
14537 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
14538 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
14541 \begin_layout Standard
14542 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
14543 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
14544 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14545 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14547 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
14550 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
14551 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
14554 \begin_layout Standard
14555 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14565 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
14567 or other font deficiencies;
14568 so you might have to experiment.
14576 \begin_layout Subsection
14577 Document Font and Font size
14578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14580 name "subsec:Document-Font"
14585 \begin_inset Index idx
14590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14592 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14607 \begin_inset Index idx
14612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14631 \begin_layout Standard
14632 You can set the document fonts in the
14634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14638 \begin_inset Index idx
14643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14645 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14664 section of the dialog,
14665 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
14670 \begin_inset space ~
14680 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
14681 \begin_inset space ~
14684 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
14687 \begin_layout Standard
14693 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
14694 This requires that you use
14707 as the output format,
14709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14713 \begin_inset space \space{}
14716 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
14717 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
14718 installed (see section
14719 \begin_inset space ~
14723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14725 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
14731 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
14733 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
14734 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
14736 \begin_inset space ~
14741 since \SpecialChar LyX
14742 cannot determine the family.
14743 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
14744 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
14747 cannot determine this in advance,
14748 so you might need to experiment.
14751 \begin_layout Standard
14752 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
14753 fonts (which is the default),
14754 the possible options for the font include
14758 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
14765 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14766 With LyX's automatic font encoding,
14768 depending on the document language,
14769 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14777 \begin_inset space ~
14783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14790 ) or a look-alike of this font:
14792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14809 European Computer Modern
14812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14821 some classes set different default fonts.
14824 \begin_layout Standard
14830 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
14831 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14836 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14839 \begin_inset space ~
14844 version 6 or later,
14845 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
14850 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
14851 you have to use a vector font.
14852 Depending on how your document should look,
14856 \begin_layout Itemize
14860 \begin_inset space ~
14866 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14878 \begin_inset space ~
14883 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14884 community in order to replace
14888 as the default font.
14889 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14890 Except for some details,
14891 where the appearance was improved,
14895 \begin_inset space ~
14908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14909 One difference is improved kerning.
14917 \begin_layout Itemize
14918 If you do not like the look of
14927 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
14929 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14933 \begin_inset space ~
14939 \begin_inset space ~
14949 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14950 \begin_inset space ~
14953 serif and typewriter fonts,
14957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14958 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14966 \begin_inset space ~
14975 for sans serif text),
14976 or different shapes of the same font,
14978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14982 \begin_inset space \space{}
14990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14994 \begin_inset space \space{}
15000 \begin_inset space ~
15008 \begin_inset space ~
15018 but you can also select your own.
15019 \begin_inset Newline newline
15022 The differences between roman,
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15035 fonts are explained in section
15036 \begin_inset space ~
15040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15042 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15048 \begin_inset Newline newline
15054 \begin_inset space ~
15059 was originally designed for newspapers.
15060 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
15064 \begin_inset space ~
15069 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
15072 \begin_layout Standard
15073 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
15089 Some classes provide additional sizes.
15094 depends on the class you are using.
15095 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
15098 \begin_layout Standard
15099 Note that the font size is the
15104 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
15105 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
15107 and subscripts) by this value.
15108 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
15111 \begin_inset space ~
15117 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
15118 \begin_inset space ~
15122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15124 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15132 \begin_layout Standard
15136 \begin_inset space ~
15141 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
15143 \begin_inset space ~
15146 serif or typewriter.
15151 selection uses what is preset by the class,
15152 the other selections override this.
15163 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
15166 \begin_layout Standard
15171 LaTeX font encoding
15173 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15179 \begin_inset Index idx
15184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15187 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15203 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
15204 Unless you have specific reasons,
15212 \begin_layout Standard
15216 Use Old Style Figures
15220 Use True Small Caps
15223 These are extra features some fonts provide.
15226 Use Old Style Figures
15229 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
15230 Old style figures are the numerals (0
15231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15238 9) with ascenders and descenders,
15239 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
15242 Use True Small Caps
15244 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
15245 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
15246 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
15249 \begin_layout Standard
15252 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
15257 if you use non-TeX fonts),
15263 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
15267 \begin_layout Standard
15272 allows users of the languages Chinese,
15274 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
15278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15285 \begin_inset Index idx
15290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15293 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15307 So this has no effect for the document language
15323 \begin_layout Standard
15326 Enable micro-typographic extensions
15328 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15334 \begin_inset Index idx
15339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15360 \begin_layout Standard
15363 Disallow line breaks after dashes
15365 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
15369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15370 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15372 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15378 instead of ligatures (--,
15380 \begin_inset space ~
15384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15386 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
15397 \begin_layout Standard
15398 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
15402 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15411 When you choose a new font or font size,
15417 change the screen font!
15418 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
15419 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
15421 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
15423 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 \begin_inset space ~
15432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15434 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
15447 \begin_layout Subsection
15451 \begin_layout Standard
15452 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
15453 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
15454 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
15455 fonts for your document,
15456 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
15458 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15462 \begin_inset Index idx
15467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15484 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
15485 automatically selects a math font.
15486 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
15487 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
15488 's default font family
15489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15495 \begin_inset space ~
15501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15506 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
15509 \begin_layout Standard
15510 Note that the math font will not be used for
15514 (which is inserted with the shortcut
15520 or by the insertion of the command
15527 Also note that some math fonts are sans
15528 \begin_inset space ~
15532 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
15534 \begin_inset space ~
15537 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
15540 \begin_inset space ~
15548 \begin_inset space ~
15553 in the document font settings.
15556 \begin_layout Standard
15557 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
15558 fonts for the document,
15559 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
15560 font (in most cases
15561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 \begin_inset space ~
15573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15576 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
15577 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
15578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15584 \begin_inset space ~
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15596 \begin_layout Subsection
15597 Using Different Text Styles
15598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15600 name "subsec:charstyles"
15605 \begin_inset Index idx
15610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15617 \begin_inset Index idx
15622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15631 \begin_layout Standard
15632 As we've already seen,
15634 automatically changes the style for certain paragraph environments.
15636 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
15637 This is where we meet the concept of
15644 \begin_layout Standard
15647 supports two text styles,
15663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15667 available with all document classes.
15669 some document classes and modules provide
15673 for specific purposes.
15674 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
15677 \begin_layout Standard
15680 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
15689 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
15694 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
15695 you selected it and chose e.
15696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15717 encourage the use of
15729 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
15731 \begin_inset space ~
15735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15737 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15743 Rather than fiddling with
15748 they encourage the use of
15753 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
15754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15759 \begin_inset Quotes els
15763 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15768 \begin_inset Quotes els
15772 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15776 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
15778 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
15779 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
15780 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
15781 On a more practical level,
15782 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
15783 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
15788 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
15789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15795 you would have to change any single occurrence.
15796 With a semantic markup (such as
15802 you'd just need to change the definition of
15807 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15810 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
15811 using different markup semantics.
15814 \begin_layout Standard
15816 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
15820 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15821 Builtin Text Styles
15822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15824 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15831 \begin_layout Standard
15832 The two builtin text styles can be activated via the
15841 \begin_layout Standard
15847 do one of the following:
15850 \begin_layout Itemize
15851 click on the toolbar button
15860 \begin_layout Itemize
15861 use the key binding
15870 \begin_layout Itemize
15878 arg "dialog-show character"
15884 arg "dialog-show character"
15894 \begin_layout Standard
15895 This command is a toggle.
15901 style is already active,
15902 they deactivate it.
15905 \begin_layout Standard
15906 One typically uses the
15910 style for proper names.
15913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15920 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
15922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15928 \begin_layout Standard
15934 is producing text in
15939 but the definition can be changed.
15942 \begin_layout Standard
15943 A more widely used text style is the
15948 You can activate (or deactivate —
15949 it's also a toggle) the
15956 \begin_layout Itemize
15957 clicking on the toolbar button
15966 \begin_layout Itemize
15967 using the keybindings
15976 \begin_layout Itemize
15984 arg "dialog-show character"
15990 arg "dialog-show character"
16000 \begin_layout Standard
16005 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16006 packages use a different font,
16007 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16011 \begin_layout Standard
16012 We've been using the
16016 style all over the place in this document.
16017 Here's one more example:
16020 \begin_layout Quotation
16023 Do not overuse text styles!
16026 \begin_layout Standard
16027 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
16028 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
16029 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
16030 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse text styles.
16033 \begin_layout Standard
16034 In contrast to the custom text styles,
16035 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
16040 You can therefore always reset to the default font using the key binding
16051 arg "dialog-show character"
16059 arg "dialog-show character"
16065 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16069 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
16076 \begin_layout Standard
16077 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
16078 a module (see section
16079 \begin_inset space ~
16083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16085 reference "subsec:Modules"
16094 or local layout settings (see section
16095 \begin_inset space ~
16099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16101 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
16107 As the two builtin styles,
16112 markup for specific functions.
16119 module that provides,
16120 among other things,
16121 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
16133 \begin_inset Quotes els
16137 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16143 \begin_layout Standard
16144 These styles can be found,
16148 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16154 \begin_layout Standard
16155 For the purpose of demonstration,
16156 we have loaded in this document the optional module
16160 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
16161 By example of the emphasized style,
16162 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
16167 appears as normal font change,
16168 the custom text style
16169 \begin_inset Flex Emph
16172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16178 appears as an inset,
16179 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
16180 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
16182 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
16184 \begin_inset Flex Code
16187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16195 \begin_inset Flex Strong
16198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16206 \begin_inset Flex Noun
16209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16216 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
16219 \begin_layout Subsection
16220 Tweaking Text with the
16225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16227 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16232 \begin_inset Index idx
16237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16246 \begin_layout Standard
16247 There are always occasions when you will need to do some formal fine-tuning;
16248 so \SpecialChar LyX
16249 gives you a way to customize the properties of text passages.
16251 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
16253 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
16256 \begin_layout Standard
16257 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
16259 generally the better way of handling such issues),
16260 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
16265 comes in as a last resort.
16268 \begin_layout Standard
16269 Before we document how to tweak the text properties,
16270 we want to issue a warning yet again:
16271 Don't overuse that!
16273 \begin_inset Newline newline
16276 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
16279 \begin_layout Standard
16280 To tweak text properties,
16284 arg "dialog-show character"
16287 dialog or press the toolbar button
16290 arg "dialog-show character"
16294 There are several combo boxes in this dialog,
16295 each corresponding to a different text property that you can choose.
16296 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
16300 \begin_inset space ~
16306 which keeps the current state of that property.
16311 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
16312 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
16315 \begin_layout Standard
16321 and their options (in addition to
16324 \begin_inset space ~
16336 \begin_layout Labeling
16337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16351 The possible options are:
16355 \begin_layout Labeling
16356 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16361 This is the Roman font family.
16362 Normally a serif font.
16363 It's also the default family.
16373 \begin_layout Labeling
16374 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16378 \begin_inset space ~
16385 This is the Sans Serif font family.
16397 \begin_layout Labeling
16398 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16405 This is the Typewriter font family.
16411 arg "font-typewriter"
16419 \begin_layout Standard
16420 The general differences of these families are:
16423 \begin_layout Itemize
16428 fonts use characters with serifs.
16429 These are the small
16430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16437 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16438 The following example shows the difference:
16439 \begin_inset Newline newline
16443 \begin_inset Newline newline
16448 text without serifs
16451 \begin_inset Newline newline
16454 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16455 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16462 \begin_layout Itemize
16467 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16468 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16469 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16472 \begin_layout Itemize
16478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16486 which means every character has the same width;
16488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16505 \begin_inset Newline newline
16509 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16523 \begin_inset Note Note
16526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16527 For more on phantoms see section
16528 \begin_inset space ~
16532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16534 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16545 \begin_inset Newline newline
16552 \begin_layout Labeling
16553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16558 This corresponds to the print weight.
16563 \begin_layout Labeling
16564 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16569 This is the Medium font series.
16570 It's also the default series.
16573 \begin_layout Labeling
16574 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16581 This is the Bold font series.
16594 \begin_layout Labeling
16595 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16600 As the name implies.
16605 \begin_layout Labeling
16606 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16611 This is the Upright font shape.
16612 It's also the default shape.
16615 \begin_layout Labeling
16616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16627 is the Italic font shape
16633 \begin_layout Labeling
16634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16641 This is the Slanted font shape
16643 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
16645 this is different from italic).
16648 \begin_layout Labeling
16649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16653 \begin_inset space ~
16660 This is the Small caps font shape
16667 \begin_layout Labeling
16668 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16673 Alters the size of the font.
16674 You won't find numerical values here;
16675 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
16677 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16679 but a general description of what you want to do.
16684 \begin_layout Labeling
16685 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16706 arg "font-size tiny"
16712 \begin_layout Labeling
16713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16734 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16740 \begin_layout Labeling
16741 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16762 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16768 \begin_layout Labeling
16769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16790 arg "font-size small"
16796 \begin_layout Labeling
16797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16811 It's also the default size.
16815 arg "font-size normal"
16821 \begin_layout Labeling
16822 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16843 arg "font-size large"
16849 \begin_layout Labeling
16850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16871 arg "font-size larger"
16877 \begin_layout Labeling
16878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16899 arg "font-size largest"
16905 \begin_layout Labeling
16906 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16927 arg "font-size huge"
16933 \begin_layout Labeling
16934 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16955 arg "font-size giant"
16961 \begin_layout Labeling
16962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16967 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
16969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16988 arg "font-size increase"
16994 \begin_layout Labeling
16995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17000 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
17002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17021 arg "font-size decrease"
17027 \begin_layout Standard
17033 don't go crazy with this feature.
17034 You should almost never need to change the font size.
17036 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
17038 This is here for fine-tuning only!
17042 \begin_layout Standard
17043 Another combo box allows to tweak
17050 \begin_layout Labeling
17051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17056 Alters the text color.
17057 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
17063 which means that the document default color set in
17065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17066 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17072 \begin_inset space ~
17172 \begin_inset Index idx
17177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17179 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17196 \begin_layout Labeling
17197 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17202 Here you can have text passages being underlined.
17203 Avoid using underlining if you can!
17204 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
17205 when you could not change fonts.
17206 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
17207 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
17208 because some people
17212 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
17217 \begin_layout Labeling
17218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17223 Don't use underlining.
17226 \begin_layout Labeling
17227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17234 This is text with Single underlining on.
17240 arg "font-underline"
17246 \begin_inset Newline newline
17252 \begin_layout Labeling
17253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17260 This is text with Double underlining on.
17266 arg "font-underunderline"
17272 \begin_layout Labeling
17273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17280 This is text with Wavy underlining on.
17286 arg "font-underwave"
17290 \begin_inset Newline newline
17293 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
17294 Keep antinausea pills handy.
17298 \begin_layout Labeling
17299 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17304 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
17308 \begin_layout Labeling
17309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17314 Don't use strikethrough.
17317 \begin_layout Labeling
17318 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17325 This is text with Single strikethrough on.
17331 arg "font-strikeout"
17335 \begin_inset Newline newline
17338 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
17341 \begin_layout Labeling
17342 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17346 \begin_inset space ~
17353 This is text with /-strikethrough on.
17356 \begin_inset Newline newline
17359 This is used to make text hardly readable.
17363 \begin_layout Standard
17364 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
17367 \begin_layout Labeling
17368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17373 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
17374 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
17375 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
17376 \begin_inset Newline newline
17379 If you have for example,
17380 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
17382 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
17383 When using the spell checking (see section
17384 \begin_inset space ~
17388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17390 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17395 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17396 \begin_inset Newline newline
17399 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
17402 Exclude from Spellchecking
17405 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17408 \begin_layout Standard
17409 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
17410 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17411 \begin_inset space ~
17415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17417 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17429 \begin_layout Itemize
17437 This is text with emphasize on
17442 \begin_layout Itemize
17450 This is text with Noun on.
17453 \begin_layout Standard
17454 So you have a huge number of combinations to select from.
17455 Once you have applied a text property via the
17458 arg "dialog-show character"
17464 arg "dialog-show character"
17468 the settings are temporarily saved.
17469 You can activate the last applied properties by using the toolbar button
17472 arg "textstyle-apply"
17476 The button lets you apply those even when the dialog isn't visible.
17477 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
17478 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17479 20) most recently applied settings,
17480 from which you can select one.
17483 \begin_layout Standard
17484 To completely reset the text properties of a selection to the default,
17495 from the menu of the toolbar button
17498 arg "textstyle-apply"
17505 \begin_layout Standard
17506 We conclude this section with the same warning once again:
17507 Do not overuse the fonts!
17509 more often than not,
17510 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17513 \begin_layout Section
17514 Printing and Previewing
17517 \begin_layout Subsection
17521 \begin_layout Standard
17522 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
17524 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17525 Before we tell you that,
17526 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
17527 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17529 Additional Features
17534 \begin_layout Standard
17536 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17539 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17540 typesetting system,
17541 but to prevent confusion,
17542 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17545 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17548 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17549 to turn your writing into printable output.
17550 This happens in two stages:
17553 \begin_layout Enumerate
17556 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17558 generating a file with the extension,
17560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17574 \begin_layout Enumerate
17577 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17578 to use the commands in the
17582 file to produce printable output.
17585 \begin_layout Subsection
17586 Output file formats
17587 \begin_inset Index idx
17592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17601 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17608 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17610 \begin_inset Index idx
17615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17617 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17634 \begin_layout Standard
17635 This file type has the extension
17636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17648 It contains your document as plain text in UTF-8 encoding.
17651 \begin_layout Standard
17652 You can export your document to plain text with the menu
17654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17655 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17657 \begin_inset space ~
17664 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17665 bibliography (section
17666 \begin_inset space ~
17670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17672 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17678 If your document includes such material,
17681 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17682 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17684 \begin_inset space ~
17688 \begin_inset space ~
17692 \begin_inset space ~
17700 \begin_inset space ~
17704 \begin_inset space ~
17710 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to plain text.
17713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17716 \begin_inset Index idx
17721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17723 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17741 \begin_layout Standard
17742 This file type has the extension
17743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17754 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17755 program to process your document.
17756 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17758 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17759 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
17760 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17761 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17762 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
17765 \begin_layout Standard
17766 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17767 -file using the menu
17769 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17770 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17774 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17775 export variants are explained in section
17776 \begin_inset space ~
17780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17782 reference "subsec:Export"
17790 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17792 \begin_inset Index idx
17797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17799 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17816 \begin_layout Standard
17817 This file type has the extension
17818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17839 because it is completely portable;
17840 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17841 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17845 \begin_layout Standard
17846 DVI files do not contain images,
17847 they only link to them.
17848 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17849 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
17850 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
17851 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17854 \begin_layout Standard
17855 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17857 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17858 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17864 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17866 \begin_inset space ~
17872 The latter option uses the program
17874 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17880 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17883 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17884 \begin_inset space ~
17888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17890 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17896 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17897 is still a work in progress,
17898 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
17902 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17904 \begin_inset Index idx
17909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17911 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17928 \begin_layout Standard
17929 This file type has the extension
17930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17942 PostScript was developed by the company
17946 as a printer language.
17947 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
17948 PostScript can be seen as a
17949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17952 programming language
17953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17957 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 If you are interested in learning more about this,
17963 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17969 \begin_inset Index idx
17974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17977 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
17980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17996 As a result of this,
17997 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
18000 \begin_layout Standard
18001 PostScript can only contain images in the format
18002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18005 Encapsulated PostScript
18006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18023 As \SpecialChar LyX
18024 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
18025 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
18029 \begin_inset space ~
18032 images in your document,
18035 \begin_inset space ~
18038 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18039 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18041 So if you plan to use PostScript,
18042 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
18045 \begin_layout Standard
18046 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18048 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18049 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18057 \begin_inset Index idx
18062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18064 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 \begin_inset Index idx
18084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18093 \begin_layout Standard
18094 This file type has the extension
18095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18111 Portable Document Format
18112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18119 was derived from PostScript.
18120 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18130 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
18133 \begin_layout Standard
18134 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18138 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18171 Portable Network Graphics
18172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18189 You can also use any other image format,
18190 because \SpecialChar LyX
18191 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
18192 But as described in the section about PostScript,
18193 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
18194 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18197 \begin_layout Standard
18198 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18200 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18206 \begin_layout Description
18208 \begin_inset space ~
18211 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18215 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18218 \begin_layout Description
18220 \begin_inset space ~
18227 ) This uses the program
18229 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18232 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18235 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18244 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18245 \begin_inset space ~
18249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18251 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18257 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18258 is still a work in progress,
18259 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
18263 \begin_layout Description
18265 \begin_inset space ~
18272 ) This uses the program
18277 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18283 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
18284 \begin_inset space ~
18288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18290 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18296 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
18298 vertically written Japanese.
18301 \begin_layout Description
18303 \begin_inset space ~
18306 (cropped) This is the same as
18309 \begin_inset space ~
18314 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18315 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18316 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18319 \begin_layout Description
18321 \begin_inset space ~
18324 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18328 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
18331 \begin_layout Description
18333 \begin_inset space ~
18336 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18340 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18341 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18345 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18346 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18349 \begin_layout Standard
18353 \begin_inset space ~
18362 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
18365 and works without problems.
18366 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18367 or specific OpenType fonts,
18368 you might want to try out
18371 \begin_inset space ~
18379 \begin_inset space ~
18385 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
18392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18394 \begin_inset Index idx
18399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18416 \begin_inset Index idx
18421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18430 \begin_layout Standard
18431 This file type has the extension
18432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18444 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18445 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18446 When \SpecialChar LyX
18448 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
18449 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18452 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18455 between different formats,
18456 which are described in section
18458 Math Output in XHTML
18463 \begin_inset space ~
18471 \begin_layout Standard
18472 XHTML output remains
18473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18481 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18482 features are supported yet.
18486 and the World Wide Web
18491 Additional Features
18494 for more information.
18497 \begin_layout Standard
18498 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18500 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18501 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18507 \begin_layout Subsection
18509 \begin_inset Index idx
18514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18516 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18533 \begin_layout Standard
18534 To get a look at the final version of your document,
18535 with all of the page breaks in place,
18536 the footnotes correctly numbered,
18546 or use the toolbar button
18553 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
18554 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18555 \begin_inset space ~
18559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18561 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18566 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
18567 \begin_inset space ~
18571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18573 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18579 Further output formats can be selected via
18581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18582 View (Other Formats)
18584 or the toolbar button
18593 \begin_layout Standard
18594 If you have changed your document,
18595 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
18597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18603 Update (Other Formats)
18609 \begin_layout Standard
18610 When you preview a file,
18611 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18612 's temporary directory.
18613 To have a real output,
18614 export your document.
18617 \begin_layout Section
18618 A few Words about Typography
18619 \begin_inset Index idx
18624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18633 \begin_layout Subsection
18635 Dashes and Minus Signs
18636 \begin_inset Index idx
18641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18648 \begin_inset Index idx
18653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18662 \begin_layout Standard
18663 In \SpecialChar LyX
18666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18677 symbol comes in four variants:
18698 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18704 \begin_layout Standard
18705 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18715 height_special "totalheight"
18720 backgroundcolor "none"
18723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18724 \begin_inset Tabular
18725 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18726 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18727 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18728 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18729 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18730 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18731 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18759 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18799 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18800 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18822 system key combination
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18828 the en dash is entered with
18831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18840 and the em dash with
18843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18856 is the Mac label for the right
18866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18879 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18880 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18903 system key combination or
18904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18931 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18970 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18976 \begin_layout Standard
18977 Dashes can also be inserted with
18979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18981 \begin_inset space ~
18984 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18992 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
18995 \begin_layout Standard
18996 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
18997 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
18998 Here are some examples:
19001 \begin_layout Enumerate
19002 line- and page-breaks
19003 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19013 \begin_layout Enumerate
19016 \begin_inset space ~
19020 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19030 \begin_layout Enumerate
19031 The em dash is used without spaces:
19034 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19044 \begin_layout Enumerate
19045 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
19049 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
19059 \begin_layout Standard
19061 \begin_inset CommandInset href
19063 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
19064 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
19072 \begin_layout Subsection
19073 Dashes and Line Breaks
19074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19076 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
19083 \begin_layout Standard
19084 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
19086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19092 \begin_layout Itemize
19094 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
19095 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
19098 \begin_layout Itemize
19100 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
19103 \begin_layout Itemize
19104 In French and Spanish,
19105 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
19106 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19109 \begin_layout Standard
19111 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19112 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19123 allows line breaks after hyphens and these en-dashes and em-dashes.
19126 \begin_layout Enumerate
19127 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19128 \begin_inset space ~
19131 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19133 The Elements of Typographic Style
19136 \begin_inset space ~
19139 – can be prevented using non-breaking spaces.
19142 \begin_layout Enumerate
19143 Unwanted line breaks
19147 dashes must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19154 Prevent Hyphenation
19159 \begin_inset space ~
19175 in \SpecialChar TeX
19177 a non-breaking space does not suffice.
19182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19183 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
19184 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
19193 \begin_layout Itemize
19195 \begin_inset space ~
19199 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19209 height_special "totalheight"
19214 backgroundcolor "none"
19217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 \begin_layout Itemize
19228 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19238 height_special "totalheight"
19243 backgroundcolor "none"
19246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19248 \begin_inset space ~
19256 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19257 \begin_inset space ~
19260 – sont très utiles.
19263 \begin_layout Itemize
19268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19278 un inciso con rayas—
19283 \begin_layout Standard
19284 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19285 \begin_inset space ~
19288 – in contrast to an overfull line
19289 \begin_inset space ~
19292 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19296 \begin_layout Standard
19297 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
19298 you can select the option
19300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19301 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19302 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19303 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19308 \begin_layout Enumerate
19309 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19310 They can be prevented using non-breaking spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
19316 \begin_layout Itemize
19318 \begin_inset space ~
19321 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19322 \begin_inset space ~
19325 – sont très utiles.
19329 \begin_layout Enumerate
19330 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19331 \begin_inset Newline newline
19336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19337 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19339 \begin_inset space ~
19343 \begin_inset space ~
19352 \begin_layout Itemize
19353 Em-dashes without spaces—
19354 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19355 common in American English—
19356 \SpecialChar allowbreak
19357 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
19360 \begin_layout Standard
19361 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19362 \begin_inset space ~
19366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19368 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19380 \begin_layout Enumerate
19383 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
19384 \begin_inset space ~
19388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19390 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19402 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19405 \begin_layout Standard
19406 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19408 \begin_inset space ~
19412 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19421 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19429 \begin_layout Standard
19430 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19432 \begin_inset space ~
19436 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19437 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
19439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19446 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
19451 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
19459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 The behavior was changed since
19461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19479 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
19480 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19488 \begin_layout Standard
19491 \begin_inset space ~
19499 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19501 \begin_inset space ~
19504 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19508 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19509 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19510 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19512 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19517 If you used both literal and
19518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19525 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19527 \begin_inset space ~
19531 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19534 \begin_layout Subsection
19536 \begin_inset Index idx
19541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19550 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19557 \begin_layout Standard
19558 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19559 but automatically in the output.
19560 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19566 \begin_inset Index idx
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19574 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19588 following the rules of the document language.
19590 does not hyphenate text in the
19594 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19597 \begin_layout Standard
19599 hyphenates almost perfectly;
19600 it only has problems with text in the
19604 font and with unusual constructs,
19606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19614 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19615 cannot break a word correctly,
19616 you can set hyphenation points manually.
19617 This is done with the menu
19619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19620 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19622 \begin_inset space ~
19628 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
19629 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
19632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19639 that are common in word processors,
19640 these added hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19642 If no hyphenation is necessary or the automatic hyphenation is disabled,
19647 \begin_layout Standard
19648 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
19649 does not hyphenate correctly,
19650 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
19651 how to hyphenate it by adding the command
19652 \begin_inset Flex Code
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19658 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19663 to the preamble which takes as its argument one or more words with their hyphenation points marked by a hyphen,
19665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19670 \begin_inset Flex Code
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19676 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion dis-quo-ta-tions}
19681 You can also use this to prevent hyphenation of a word,
19683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19688 \begin_inset Flex Code
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19694 hyphenation{unbroken}
19700 If there are a lot of these hyphenation exceptions,
19701 you can collect them in a single file (say,
19703 \begin_inset Flex Code
19706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19712 ) and then import the file via:
19714 \begin_inset Flex Code
19717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 usepackage{myhyphens}
19726 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
19727 can find it (see the section
19729 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
19739 \begin_layout Standard
19741 \begin_inset Flex Code
19744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19747 hyphenation{<patterns>}
19752 applies to the language that is current when the command is issued (in the preamble,
19753 this is usually the main language of the document).
19754 If you want to define patterns for specific languages without knowing which language is in effect,
19755 the language packages
19763 provide specific variants of the command:
19766 \begin_layout Itemize
19773 \begin_inset Flex Code
19776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19779 babelhyphenation[<language 1>,
19790 \begin_layout Itemize
19797 \begin_inset Flex Code
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19803 pghyphenation[<language options>]{<language>}{<patterns>}
19811 \begin_layout Standard
19813 depending on which language package you are using:
19816 \begin_layout Itemize
19817 \begin_inset Flex Code
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19823 babelhyphenation[german,ngerman,austrian,naustrian,swissgerman,
19824 \begin_inset Newline newline
19827 nswissgerman]{Ma-de}
19835 \begin_layout Itemize
19836 \begin_inset Flex Code
19839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19842 pghyphenation{german}{Ma-de}
19850 \begin_layout Standard
19851 in order to define the hyphenation points for all German varieties,
19855 \begin_layout Itemize
19856 \begin_inset Flex Code
19859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19862 babelhyphenation[naustrian]{Ma-de}
19870 \begin_layout Itemize
19871 \begin_inset Flex Code
19874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19877 pghyphenation[variant=austrian]{german}{Ma-de}
19885 \begin_layout Standard
19886 in order to define them only for the Austrian variety of German.
19889 \begin_layout Standard
19890 These commands only work after the language package has been loaded,
19891 which is usually after the user preamble.
19892 So it is advised that you embrace them in
19893 \begin_inset Flex Code
19896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 AtBeginDocument{\SpecialChar ldots
19906 which causes them to be issued at the end of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19910 \begin_layout Standard
19911 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19912 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
19913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19922 would then see the hyphen
19923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19930 as a line break possibility.
19931 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19932 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
19933 you can use a non-breaking hyphen (
19935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19936 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
19937 Non-Breaking Hyphen
19939 ) or put it into a makebox as described in the section
19941 Prevent Hyphenation
19946 \begin_inset space ~
19954 \begin_layout Subsection
19956 \begin_inset Index idx
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19971 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19974 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19981 \begin_layout Standard
19982 When \SpecialChar LyX
19983 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19984 to generate the final version of your document,
19986 automatically distinguishes between words,
19991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19994 appropriate amount of space.
19995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19998 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
19999 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
20002 \begin_layout Standard
20004 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
20006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20017 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
20018 it's the end of a sentence;
20019 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
20020 it's an abbreviation.
20023 \begin_layout Standard
20024 Here are some examples of
20028 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
20031 \begin_layout Itemize
20036 \begin_layout Itemize
20041 \begin_layout Standard
20042 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
20045 \begin_layout Itemize
20047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20051 this is too much space!
20054 \begin_layout Itemize
20059 \begin_layout Standard
20060 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
20063 \begin_layout Standard
20064 To fix this problem,
20065 use one of the following:
20068 \begin_layout Enumerate
20072 \begin_inset space ~
20077 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
20078 \begin_inset space ~
20082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20084 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
20090 \begin_inset Index idx
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20097 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20114 \begin_layout Enumerate
20118 \begin_inset space ~
20123 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
20124 \begin_inset space ~
20128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20130 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
20136 \begin_inset Index idx
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20143 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20160 \begin_layout Enumerate
20164 \begin_inset space ~
20168 \begin_inset space ~
20172 \begin_inset space ~
20179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20181 \begin_inset space ~
20186 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
20187 This function is also bound to
20190 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
20196 \begin_layout Standard
20197 With the corrections,
20198 our earlier examples look like this:
20201 \begin_layout Itemize
20203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20207 \begin_inset space \space{}
20210 this is too much space!
20213 \begin_layout Itemize
20214 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
20218 \begin_layout Standard
20219 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
20220 If your language is such a language,
20221 you don't need to worry,
20222 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
20223 will take care of this.
20226 \begin_layout Standard
20227 For those that do need to bother,
20228 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
20232 \begin_inset space ~
20238 feature described in the section
20240 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
20245 Additional Features
20250 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20252 \begin_inset Index idx
20257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 \begin_inset Index idx
20279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
20284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 \begin_layout Standard
20300 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
20302 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
20303 and use a closing mark at the end.
20306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20314 The keyboard character,
20320 generates this automatically.
20323 \begin_layout Standard
20324 You can specify what character the
20328 key produces by using the submenu
20334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20338 \begin_inset Index idx
20343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 dialog and switching the
20363 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
20364 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
20366 \begin_inset space ~
20372 \begin_layout Labeling
20373 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20385 \begin_inset space ~
20389 \begin_inset space ~
20393 \begin_inset Quotes els
20397 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20411 \begin_inset Quotes els
20415 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20418 quotation marks (as common,
20420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20427 \begin_layout Labeling
20428 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20431 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20435 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20439 \begin_inset space ~
20443 \begin_inset space ~
20447 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20451 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20457 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20461 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20465 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20469 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20472 quotation marks (as common,
20474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20481 \begin_layout Labeling
20482 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20485 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20489 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20493 \begin_inset space ~
20497 \begin_inset space ~
20501 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20505 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20511 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20515 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20519 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20523 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20526 quotation marks (as common,
20528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20535 \begin_layout Labeling
20536 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20539 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20543 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20547 \begin_inset space ~
20551 \begin_inset space ~
20555 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20559 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20565 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20569 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20573 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20577 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20580 quotation marks (as common,
20582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20589 \begin_layout Labeling
20590 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20593 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20597 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20601 \begin_inset space ~
20605 \begin_inset space ~
20609 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20613 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20619 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20623 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20627 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20631 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20634 quotation marks (as common,
20636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20643 \begin_layout Labeling
20644 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20647 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20651 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20655 \begin_inset space ~
20659 \begin_inset space ~
20663 \begin_inset Quotes als
20667 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20673 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20677 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20681 \begin_inset Quotes als
20685 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20688 quotation marks (as common,
20690 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20697 \begin_layout Labeling
20698 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20701 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20705 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20709 \begin_inset space ~
20713 \begin_inset space ~
20717 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20721 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20727 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20731 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20735 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20739 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20742 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20745 \begin_layout Labeling
20746 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20749 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20753 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20757 \begin_inset space ~
20761 \begin_inset space ~
20765 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20769 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20775 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20779 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20783 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20787 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20790 quotation marks (as common,
20792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20799 \begin_layout Labeling
20800 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20803 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20807 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20811 \begin_inset space ~
20815 \begin_inset space ~
20819 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20823 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20829 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20833 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20837 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20841 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20844 quotation marks (as common,
20846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20853 \begin_layout Labeling
20854 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20857 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20861 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20865 \begin_inset space ~
20869 \begin_inset space ~
20873 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20877 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20883 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20887 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20891 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20895 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20898 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20903 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20904 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20905 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
20913 \begin_layout Labeling
20914 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20917 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20921 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20925 \begin_inset space ~
20929 \begin_inset space ~
20933 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20937 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20943 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20947 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20951 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20955 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20958 quotation marks (as common,
20960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20967 \begin_layout Labeling
20968 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20971 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20975 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20979 \begin_inset space ~
20983 \begin_inset space ~
20987 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20991 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20997 \begin_inset Quotes wld
21001 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
21005 \begin_inset Quotes wls
21009 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
21012 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
21015 \begin_layout Labeling
21016 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21019 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21023 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21027 \begin_inset space ~
21031 \begin_inset space ~
21035 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21039 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21047 \begin_inset Quotes pld
21055 \begin_inset Quotes prd
21063 \begin_inset Quotes ald
21071 \begin_inset Quotes ard
21076 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
21079 \begin_layout Labeling
21080 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21081 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21089 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21095 \begin_inset space ~
21099 \begin_inset space ~
21105 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21113 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21117 \begin_inset Quotes jld
21121 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
21125 \begin_inset Quotes jls
21129 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
21132 quotation marks (as common,
21134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21145 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
21149 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
21157 \begin_layout Labeling
21158 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21159 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21167 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21173 \begin_inset space ~
21177 \begin_inset space ~
21183 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21191 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21195 \begin_inset Quotes kld
21199 \begin_inset Quotes krd
21203 \begin_inset Quotes kls
21207 \begin_inset Quotes krs
21210 quotation marks (as common,
21212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21216 in North Korea and China)
21217 \begin_inset script superscript
21219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21222 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
21238 \begin_layout Labeling
21239 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
21242 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21246 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21250 \begin_inset space ~
21254 \begin_inset space ~
21258 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21262 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21268 \begin_inset Quotes dld
21274 \begin_inset Quotes drd
21280 \begin_inset Quotes dls
21286 \begin_inset Quotes drs
21291 quotation marks (as common in Israel)
21294 \begin_layout Standard
21295 Inner quotation marks
21299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21300 In many writing cultures,
21301 these are single quotation marks.
21302 But as the British and French styles show,
21303 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
21304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21311 does not necessarily mean
21312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21320 This is why we call them
21321 \begin_inset Quotes els
21325 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21341 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
21343 \begin_inset Quotes els
21347 \begin_inset Quotes ers
21350 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
21353 arg "quote-insert inner"
21358 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21364 \begin_layout Standard
21366 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
21368 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
21369 even if the document-wide style changes.
21370 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
21371 If you check the setting
21373 Use dynamic quotation marks
21377 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21378 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21383 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
21384 they appear in a special color).
21385 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
21386 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
21387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21391 if your publisher requests a different style).
21394 \begin_layout Standard
21395 Individual quotation marks (i.
21396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21400 their level [inner,
21404 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
21407 \begin_layout Subsection
21409 \begin_inset Index idx
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 \begin_inset Index idx
21436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21455 name "subsec:Ligatures"
21462 \begin_layout Standard
21463 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
21464 These groups are known as
21469 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21470 knows about ligatures,
21471 your documents will contain them too in the output.
21472 Here are the standard ligatures:
21475 \begin_layout Itemize
21479 \begin_layout Itemize
21483 \begin_layout Itemize
21487 \begin_layout Itemize
21491 \begin_layout Itemize
21495 \begin_layout Standard
21496 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21499 \begin_layout Standard
21501 you don't want a ligature in a word.
21502 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21511 it looks really weird in compound words,
21513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21528 To break a ligature,
21531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21532 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21534 \begin_inset space ~
21541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21552 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21569 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21577 \begin_layout Subsection
21579 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21581 \begin_inset Index idx
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21606 \begin_layout Standard
21609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21610 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21615 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21618 \begin_layout Description
21620 The name of the game.
21623 \begin_layout Description
21625 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21629 \begin_layout Description
21631 The \SpecialChar TeX
21632 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21636 \begin_layout Description
21637 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21638 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21642 \begin_layout Standard
21643 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21649 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21657 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21658 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21659 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21660 converges to the number
21661 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21665 The actual version is
21666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21675 the previous one was
21676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21687 \begin_layout Subsection
21689 \begin_inset Index idx
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21696 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21713 \begin_layout Standard
21714 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
21715 As you can see in the example below,
21716 it looks better when the space is smaller.
21718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21725 for units use the menu
21727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21728 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21730 \begin_inset space ~
21738 arg "space-insert thin"
21744 \begin_layout Standard
21745 Here is an example to show the differences:
21748 \begin_layout Standard
21749 \begin_inset Tabular
21750 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21751 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21752 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21753 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 \begin_inset space ~
21764 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 space between number and unit
21783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21792 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 half space between number and unit
21817 \begin_layout Subsection
21819 \begin_inset Index idx
21824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 \begin_layout Standard
21844 In the early days of word processors,
21845 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
21846 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21847 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
21848 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
21849 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21850 These bits of text became known as
21861 \begin_layout Standard
21864 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21865 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21866 But what about widows and orphans,
21867 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
21868 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21869 governing page breaks,
21870 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
21871 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
21872 you can add the commands
21873 \begin_inset Newline newline
21881 \begin_inset Newline newline
21889 \begin_inset Newline newline
21892 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21893 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21894 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21896 \begin_inset space ~
21900 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21902 key "latexcompanion"
21908 \begin_inset space ~
21912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21919 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21920 's page break mechanism.
21923 \begin_layout Chapter
21927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21929 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21936 \begin_layout Standard
21937 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21940 \begin_inset space ~
21946 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21949 \begin_layout Section
21951 \begin_inset Index idx
21956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21972 \begin_layout Standard
21974 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21977 \begin_layout Description
21980 \begin_inset space ~
21983 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21984 \begin_inset Newline newline
21988 \begin_inset Note Note
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
22000 \begin_layout Description
22001 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
22002 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
22005 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
22006 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
22008 \begin_inset space ~
22014 \begin_inset Newline newline
22018 \begin_inset Note Comment
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22022 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
22031 \begin_layout Description
22033 \begin_inset space ~
22036 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
22038 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
22040 \begin_inset space ~
22046 \begin_inset Newline newline
22050 \begin_inset Newline newline
22054 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
22064 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
22069 of a comment that appears in the output.
22075 \begin_inset Newline newline
22079 \begin_inset Newline newline
22082 As you can see in the example,
22083 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
22086 \begin_layout Standard
22087 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
22095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22099 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
22102 \begin_layout Section
22104 \begin_inset Index idx
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22118 name "sec:Footnotes"
22125 \begin_layout Standard
22127 uses boxes to display footnotes:
22128 When you insert a footnote using the menu
22130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22133 or the toolbar button
22136 arg "footnote-insert"
22150 \begin_inset Graphics
22151 filename clipart/footnote.png
22160 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22161 's representation of your footnote.
22171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22195 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
22196 Clicking on the box label again will close
22209 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
22210 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
22225 \begin_layout Standard
22226 Here is an example footnote:
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22235 To close a footnote,
22236 click on the footnote box label.
22244 \begin_layout Standard
22245 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
22246 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
22247 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
22248 according to the document class.
22250 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
22251 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22257 ey are described in the
22260 \begin_inset space ~
22268 \begin_layout Section
22270 \begin_inset Index idx
22275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22284 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
22291 \begin_layout Standard
22292 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
22294 When you insert a margin note via the menu
22296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22298 \begin_inset space ~
22303 or the toolbar button
22306 arg "marginalnote-insert"
22326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22333 appearing within your text.
22334 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
22335 's representation of your margin
22344 \begin_layout Standard
22345 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
22349 \begin_inset Marginal
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 This is a marginal note.
22362 \begin_layout Standard
22363 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
22364 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
22365 right on odd pages.
22368 \begin_layout Standard
22369 For further information about marginal notes see the section
22372 \begin_inset space ~
22380 \begin_inset space ~
22388 \begin_layout Section
22389 Graphics and Images
22390 \begin_inset Index idx
22395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22402 \begin_inset Index idx
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22416 name "sec:Graphics"
22423 \begin_layout Standard
22424 To insert an image in your document,
22425 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
22428 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22433 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22437 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
22440 \begin_layout Standard
22441 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
22446 tab allows you to choose your image file.
22447 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
22448 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
22449 \begin_inset space ~
22453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22455 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
22463 \begin_layout Standard
22468 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
22469 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
22472 \begin_inset space ~
22476 \begin_inset space ~
22485 \begin_inset space ~
22489 \begin_inset space ~
22493 \begin_inset space ~
22498 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
22499 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
22506 \begin_layout Standard
22510 \begin_inset space ~
22514 \begin_inset space ~
22519 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
22520 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22522 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22527 \begin_inset space ~
22532 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
22533 only a frame with the image size is printed.
22536 \begin_layout Standard
22537 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22538 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
22539 This is an example image within a separate,
22540 horizontally centered paragraph:
22543 \begin_layout Standard
22545 \begin_inset Graphics
22546 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22554 \begin_layout Standard
22555 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
22556 you have to put the image into a float,
22558 \begin_inset space ~
22562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22564 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22572 \begin_layout Subsection
22574 \begin_inset Index idx
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22598 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22605 \begin_layout Standard
22606 You can insert images
22607 \change_inserted 5863208 1701369912
22612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22614 \change_inserted 5863208 1701371417
22615 Apart from static images specific scripts generating images can be used as well.
22616 For example one can use Gnuplot script (files with
22617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22640 extension) instead of image filename.
22642 \change_inserted -1162675398 1718386882
22643 Gnuplot scripts can also be included as external material.
22644 Labels and numbers are then typeset in document fonts,
22645 and LaTeX math used in the Gnuplot script is rendered.
22647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
22649 name "Gnuplot in LyX wiki page"
22650 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Tools/GnuplotInLyX"
22655 for more information about installing the template for Gnuplot scripts as external material.
22664 in any known file format.
22665 But as we explained in section
22666 \begin_inset space ~
22670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22672 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22678 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22680 therefore uses the program
22684 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22685 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22686 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22687 \begin_inset space ~
22691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22693 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22701 \begin_layout Standard
22702 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22705 \begin_layout Description
22707 \begin_inset space ~
22710 images consist of pixel values,
22711 often in a compressed form.
22712 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22713 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22717 Graphics Interchange Format
22718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22735 \begin_inset Index idx
22740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22761 Portable Network Graphics
22762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22779 \begin_inset Index idx
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22786 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22805 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22835 \begin_inset Index idx
22840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 \begin_layout Description
22861 \begin_inset space ~
22864 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
22865 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
22866 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22867 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22868 \begin_inset Newline newline
22871 Scalable image formats can be
22872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22875 Scalable Vector Graphics
22876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22893 \begin_inset Index idx
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22919 Encapsulated PostScript
22920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22937 \begin_inset Index idx
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22944 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22963 Portable Document Format
22964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22981 \begin_inset Index idx
22986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23002 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
23003 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
23007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23008 In the case of PDF,
23009 the original image is additionally compressed.
23017 \begin_layout Standard
23018 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
23026 \begin_layout Subsection
23027 Grouping of Image Settings
23028 \begin_inset Index idx
23033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23035 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 \begin_layout Standard
23053 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
23054 Images within such a group share their settings,
23055 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
23056 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
23059 \begin_layout Standard
23060 A new group can be set by pressing the button
23063 \begin_inset space ~
23067 \begin_inset space ~
23079 \begin_inset space ~
23083 \begin_inset space ~
23089 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
23092 \begin_layout Section
23094 \begin_inset Index idx
23099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23115 \begin_layout Standard
23116 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
23119 arg "tabular-insert"
23124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23128 A dialog will appear,
23129 asking you for the number of rows and columns,
23130 and you can select a specific (border) style.
23131 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
23132 This separation appears due to a double line:
23133 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
23134 Here is an example table:
23137 \begin_layout Standard
23139 \begin_inset Tabular
23140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
23141 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 \begin_layout Standard
23342 This corresponds to the
23343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23350 table style listed in the style selection.
23353 \begin_layout Standard
23354 Other available styles include:
23357 \begin_layout Itemize
23359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23366 which looks line the above table,
23367 but without the first row being separated via double line,
23370 \begin_layout Itemize
23371 a border-less table with no lines at all,
23374 \begin_layout Itemize
23376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23383 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
23393 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
23396 \begin_layout Standard
23397 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
23399 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23400 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23404 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
23405 you should alter this setting.
23408 \begin_layout Subsection
23412 \begin_layout Standard
23413 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
23415 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
23419 This brings up the table dialog.
23420 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
23421 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
23422 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
23423 This means that if you select more cells,
23424 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
23427 \begin_layout Standard
23428 In addition to the table dialog,
23432 \begin_inset space ~
23437 helps you in setting table properties.
23438 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
23441 \begin_layout Standard
23445 \begin_inset space ~
23450 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
23451 If you add a row or column,
23452 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
23453 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
23454 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
23456 \begin_inset space ~
23460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23462 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
23470 \begin_layout Standard
23471 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
23480 This will merge the cells to
23485 spread over more than one column/row.
23486 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
23487 so that the alignment,
23489 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
23490 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
23493 \begin_layout Standard
23495 \begin_inset Tabular
23496 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
23497 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
23498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23499 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
23500 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
23501 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23521 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23632 \begin_layout Standard
23633 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23634 -arguments for the table.
23635 They are necessary for special table formatting,
23636 such as the multirow cells,
23637 explained in the chapter
23644 \begin_inset space ~
23650 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23651 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23652 but are visible in the output.
23655 \begin_layout Standard
23656 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 Most DVI-viewers are
23669 able to display rotations.
23677 \begin_layout Standard
23682 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23687 adds lines for all cell borders.
23690 \begin_layout Subsection
23692 \begin_inset Index idx
23697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23714 \begin_inset Index idx
23719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23728 \begin_layout Standard
23729 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
23730 you can use the option
23733 \begin_inset space ~
23737 \begin_inset space ~
23745 \begin_inset space ~
23750 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23751 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23754 \begin_layout Description
23760 The current row and all rows above,
23761 that don't have any special options defined,
23762 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23763 Except for the first page,
23767 \begin_inset space ~
23775 \begin_layout Description
23779 \begin_inset space ~
23785 The current row and all rows above,
23786 that don't have any special options defined,
23787 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23790 \begin_layout Description
23796 The current row and all rows below,
23797 that don't have any special options defined,
23798 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23799 except for the last page,
23803 \begin_inset space ~
23811 \begin_layout Description
23815 \begin_inset space ~
23821 The current row and all rows below,
23822 that don't have any special options defined,
23823 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23826 \begin_layout Description
23828 The first row is reset as a single column.
23829 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23835 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23838 \begin_inset space ~
23846 \begin_layout Standard
23847 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23848 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
23849 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
23850 the others will be defined as
23856 first means first in this order:
23861 \begin_inset space ~
23875 \begin_inset space ~
23881 see the following longtable to see how it works:
23884 \begin_layout Standard
23886 \begin_inset Tabular
23887 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23888 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23889 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23890 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23891 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23892 <row endfirsthead="true">
23893 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23904 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23913 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 <row endfirsthead="true">
23924 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23935 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23944 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <row endhead="true">
23957 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23968 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <row endhead="true">
23988 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23999 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24008 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 <row endfoot="true">
24021 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24032 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24072 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25014 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25023 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25043 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25105 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25136 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25167 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25198 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25260 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25291 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25322 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25415 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25477 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25508 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25539 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25570 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25663 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25694 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25726 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25757 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25788 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25819 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25850 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25912 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25974 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26004 <row endlastfoot="true">
26005 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26042 \begin_layout Subsection
26044 \begin_inset Index idx
26049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26051 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26068 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
26075 \begin_layout Standard
26076 A table cell can contain text,
26080 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
26081 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
26082 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
26088 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
26091 \begin_layout Standard
26092 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
26093 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
26094 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
26098 \begin_layout Standard
26100 \begin_inset Tabular
26101 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
26102 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26104 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
26105 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26125 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26194 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26250 This is longer now.
26255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
26307 This is longer now.
26312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26338 \begin_layout Standard
26339 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
26340 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
26344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26345 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
26350 Selection with the mouse or with
26354 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
26355 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
26358 \begin_layout Section
26360 \begin_inset Index idx
26365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26381 \begin_layout Subsection
26385 \begin_layout Standard
26386 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
26387 which doesn't have a fixed location.
26389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26396 forward or backward a page or two,
26397 to wherever it fits best.
26405 \begin_inset space ~
26411 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
26414 \begin_layout Standard
26415 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
26416 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
26417 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
26418 every float can be referenced in the text.
26419 Floats are therefore numbered.
26420 Referencing is described in section
26421 \begin_inset space ~
26425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26427 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26439 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26443 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
26444 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
26445 After the label you can insert the caption text.
26446 \begin_inset Index idx
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26453 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
26468 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
26469 -document readable,
26470 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
26471 A closed float box looks like this:
26473 \begin_inset Graphics
26474 filename clipart/float.png
26479 – a gray button with a red label.
26482 \begin_layout Standard
26483 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
26484 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
26487 \begin_layout Subsection
26489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26491 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
26496 \begin_inset Index idx
26501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26520 \begin_layout Standard
26522 \begin_inset space ~
26526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26528 reference "fig:A-star-in"
26533 was created using the menu
26535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26536 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26542 arg "float-insert figure"
26546 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
26548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26554 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
26558 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
26560 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26562 \begin_inset space ~
26570 arg "layout-paragraph"
26576 \begin_layout Standard
26577 \begin_inset Float figure
26584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26586 \begin_inset Graphics
26587 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26597 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26602 name "fig:A-star-in"
26619 \begin_layout Standard
26620 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
26621 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26632 ) and refer to it using the menu
26634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26640 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26644 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
26645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26654 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26655 will reposition the floats in the final document,
26657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26665 For more about cross-references,
26667 \begin_inset space ~
26671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26673 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26681 \begin_layout Standard
26682 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
26683 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26684 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26685 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
26686 \begin_inset space ~
26690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26692 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26699 \begin_inset space ~
26703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26705 reference "fig:Two-images"
26710 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26711 You can also set the images one below the other.
26713 \begin_inset space ~
26717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26719 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26727 reference "fig:Star"
26732 are the subfigures.
26735 \begin_layout Standard
26736 \begin_inset Float figure
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26748 \begin_inset Float figure
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26756 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26761 name "fig:Undefinable"
26773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26774 \begin_inset Graphics
26775 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26787 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26791 \begin_inset Float figure
26798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26799 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 \begin_inset Graphics
26818 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26830 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26837 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26842 name "fig:Two-images"
26859 \begin_layout Subsection
26861 \begin_inset Index idx
26866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26868 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
26871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26885 \begin_layout Standard
26886 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26888 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26889 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26892 or the toolbar button
26895 arg "float-insert table"
26899 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26901 \begin_inset space ~
26905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26907 reference "tab:Table-float"
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26916 \begin_inset Float table
26923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26924 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26929 name "tab:Table-float"
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26943 \begin_inset Tabular
26944 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26945 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26947 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26948 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27075 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
27083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27096 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27099 \end{array}\right]$
27107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
27141 \begin_layout Subsection
27143 \begin_inset Index idx
27148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27150 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27167 \begin_layout Standard
27169 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
27170 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
27171 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
27172 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
27179 \begin_inset space ~
27187 \begin_layout Section
27189 \begin_inset Index idx
27194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27203 \begin_layout Standard
27205 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
27208 all the usual rules of indentation,
27211 \begin_inset space \space{}
27217 \begin_layout Standard
27218 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
27219 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
27221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27225 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
27228 \begin_layout Standard
27230 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27240 height_special "totalheight"
27245 backgroundcolor "none"
27248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27251 This is a minipage.
27252 The text is set in an italic style.
27255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27258 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
27266 \begin_layout Standard
27267 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27270 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
27275 as described in section
27276 \begin_inset space ~
27280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27282 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
27288 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
27294 \begin_layout Standard
27295 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27305 height_special "totalheight"
27310 backgroundcolor "none"
27313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27314 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27315 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27321 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
27325 \begin_inset Box Frameless
27335 height_special "totalheight"
27340 backgroundcolor "none"
27343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27344 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
27345 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
27353 \begin_layout Standard
27354 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27360 \begin_layout Standard
27361 When you right-click on a minipage box,
27362 you can transform the box to another box type.
27363 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
27370 \begin_inset space ~
27378 \begin_layout Chapter
27379 Mathematical Formulas
27380 \begin_inset Index idx
27385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27392 \begin_inset Index idx
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27399 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27414 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27416 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
27423 \begin_layout Standard
27424 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
27429 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
27432 \begin_layout Section
27434 \begin_inset Index idx
27439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27458 \begin_layout Standard
27459 To create a math formula,
27460 you can just click on the toolbar icon
27473 That will create a little blue rectangle,
27474 with purple markers around its corners.
27475 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
27476 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
27477 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
27479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27485 \begin_layout Standard
27486 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
27489 \begin_inset space ~
27495 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
27498 \begin_layout Standard
27499 There are two main types of formulas,
27500 inline formulas and display formulas.
27501 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
27505 \begin_layout Standard
27506 This is a line with an inline formula
27507 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
27513 \begin_layout Standard
27514 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
27516 \begin_inset Formula
27523 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
27526 \begin_layout Standard
27528 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
27532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27546 followed by a space,
27547 in a formula will create the Greek letter
27548 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
27552 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
27555 \begin_inset space ~
27563 \begin_layout Subsection
27564 Navigating in Formulas
27565 \begin_inset Index idx
27570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27572 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27589 \begin_layout Standard
27590 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
27592 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
27593 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
27598 will leave a formula construct (a square root
27599 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
27604 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
27609 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
27612 \end{array}\right]$
27620 will leave the formula,
27621 placing the cursor after the formula.
27626 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
27628 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
27631 \begin_layout Standard
27637 printed in this document as
27638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27642 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27650 seems to do nothing in a formula,
27651 since it does not add a space between characters,
27652 but it does exit a nested structure.
27654 you have to be careful about using
27661 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
27670 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27680 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27684 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27690 since in the latter case only the
27693 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27698 will be under the square root sign:
27700 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27706 \begin_layout Standard
27707 You can leave many parts of a formula,
27709 partially filled in,
27711 \begin_inset Formula
27713 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27722 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
27723 or a subscript with nothing in it,
27724 the results will be unpredictable,
27725 but most constructs don't mind.
27728 \begin_layout Subsection
27732 \begin_layout Standard
27733 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27734 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
27739 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27740 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27742 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27743 That text can then be cut or copied,
27744 and then pasted within any formula,
27745 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27749 \begin_layout Subsection
27750 Exponents and Subscripts
27751 \begin_inset Index idx
27756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27758 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27773 \begin_inset Index idx
27778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27780 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27797 \begin_layout Standard
27798 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27801 arg "math-superscript"
27807 arg "math-subscript"
27811 but it is often much easier to use a command.
27813 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27820 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27830 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27837 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27842 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27849 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27855 If you use characters in the superscript,
27856 that could be accented with the circumflex
27857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27865 you have to use an extra
27869 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27872 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27879 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27885 Subscripts are similar:
27887 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27894 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27902 \begin_layout Subsection
27904 \begin_inset Index idx
27909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27911 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27928 \begin_layout Standard
27929 Create a fraction either with the command
27935 or by using the icon
27938 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27944 \begin_inset space ~
27950 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27951 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27952 To move it to the bottom,
27964 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
27965 as this example shows:
27966 \begin_inset Formula
27968 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27971 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27979 \begin_layout Subsection
27981 \begin_inset Index idx
27986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27988 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
27991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28005 \begin_layout Standard
28006 Roots can be created using the
28009 \begin_inset space ~
28017 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
28023 arg "math-insert \\root"
28045 you can produce roots of higher orders,
28053 always produces a square root.
28056 \begin_layout Subsection
28057 Operators with Limits
28058 \begin_inset Index idx
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28065 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28080 \begin_inset Index idx
28085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28087 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28104 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28111 \begin_layout Standard
28113 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
28117 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
28120 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
28121 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28122 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
28123 directly after the symbol.
28124 The sum operator will automatically place its
28125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28132 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
28133 and to the side in inline formulas,
28135 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
28140 \begin_inset Formula
28142 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
28149 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
28152 \begin_layout Standard
28153 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
28154 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
28156 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28157 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28159 \begin_inset space ~
28163 \begin_inset space ~
28177 \begin_layout Standard
28178 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
28179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28188 \begin_inset Index idx
28193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28195 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28210 \begin_inset Formula
28212 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
28217 which will place the
28218 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
28222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28230 In inline formulas it looks like this:
28232 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
28238 \begin_layout Standard
28239 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
28246 Have a look at section
28247 \begin_inset space ~
28251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28253 reference "subsec:Functions"
28258 for an explanation of function macros.
28261 \begin_layout Subsection
28263 \begin_inset Index idx
28268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28270 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28287 \begin_layout Standard
28288 Most math symbols can be found in the
28291 \begin_inset space ~
28296 under one of several categories;
28317 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28322 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
28323 you don't have to use the
28326 \begin_inset space ~
28332 you can type the command directly into the formula.
28334 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
28337 \begin_layout Subsection
28339 \begin_inset Index idx
28344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28346 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28363 \begin_layout Standard
28364 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28370 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
28376 \begin_inset space ~
28384 arg "math-insert \\space"
28388 This generates a small space,
28389 and shows a small marker on the screen.
28397 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
28400 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28402 \begin_inset Graphics
28403 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
28408 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
28409 With every space enter the size will be changed.
28410 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
28412 because they are negative spaces.
28413 Here are two examples:
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28427 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
28433 \begin_layout Standard
28444 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
28450 \begin_layout Subsection
28452 \begin_inset Index idx
28457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28476 name "subsec:Functions"
28483 \begin_layout Standard
28487 \begin_inset space ~
28492 contains under the button
28495 arg "math-insert \\functions"
28498 a number of function macros,
28500 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
28505 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
28514 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
28521 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
28523 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
28527 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
28533 \begin_layout Standard
28534 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
28536 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
28540 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
28546 \begin_layout Standard
28547 For some mathematical objects,
28549 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
28550 as described in section
28551 \begin_inset space ~
28555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28557 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
28565 \begin_layout Subsection
28567 \begin_inset Index idx
28572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28574 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28591 \begin_layout Standard
28592 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
28593 This may depend on your keyboard,
28594 or the bindings file you use.
28595 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
28599 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28602 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
28603 Our example is entered by typing
28608 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
28615 \begin_inset space ~
28619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28621 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
28626 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
28629 \begin_layout Standard
28630 \begin_inset Float table
28637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28638 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28643 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
28647 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
28655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28657 \begin_inset Tabular
28658 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
28659 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28660 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28662 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28746 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
28756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28800 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
28810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28854 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28908 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28962 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29016 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
29026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29070 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
29080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29124 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
29134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29178 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
29188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29223 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
29244 \begin_layout Standard
29245 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
29248 \begin_inset space ~
29256 arg "math-insert \\hat"
29260 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
29263 \begin_layout Section
29264 Brackets and Delimiters
29265 \begin_inset Index idx
29270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29272 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29287 \begin_inset Index idx
29292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29294 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29311 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29318 \begin_layout Standard
29319 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
29322 using just the keys
29327 But if you want to surround a large structure,
29328 like a matrix or a fraction,
29329 or if you have several layers of brackets,
29330 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
29333 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29338 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
29339 \begin_inset Formula
29341 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
29349 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
29351 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
29354 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
29357 and the expression on the right was entered using the
29363 \begin_inset Formula
29365 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
29373 \begin_layout Standard
29374 If you use the delimiter icon,
29376 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29380 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
29381 If you use the option
29384 \begin_inset space ~
29390 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
29391 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
29393 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
29399 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
29400 with a dotted line,
29401 but nothing will be printed.
29404 \begin_layout Standard
29405 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
29406 like a square root,
29407 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
29408 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
29413 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
29416 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
29418 to insert a pair of parentheses,
29419 select the structure and enter
29422 arg "math-delim ( )"
29428 \begin_layout Section
29429 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
29430 \begin_inset Index idx
29435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29437 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29452 \begin_inset Index idx
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29459 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29474 \begin_inset Index idx
29479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29481 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29485 Multi-line Equations
29498 \begin_layout Standard
29499 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
29503 \begin_inset space ~
29511 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
29515 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
29516 Here is an example:
29517 \begin_inset Formula
29519 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29528 The parentheses aren't automatic,
29529 but you can add them as described in section
29530 \begin_inset space ~
29534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29536 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
29542 When you construct the matrix,
29543 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
29545 or center-justified.
29546 This alignment is set in the box
29551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29602 for every column as default.
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29616 means that the first column will be left-justified,
29617 the second will be centered,
29618 and the third column will be right-justified,
29619 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
29620 The result will look like this:
29621 \begin_inset Formula
29624 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
29625 column & has & has\,right\\
29626 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
29635 \begin_layout Standard
29636 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
29639 arg "newline-insert newline"
29642 while the cursor is in the matrix.
29643 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
29645 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29648 or the math toolbar.
29651 \begin_layout Standard
29652 There are other arrays used in formulas,
29653 such as distinctions of cases.
29654 It can be created with the menu
29656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29657 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29659 \begin_inset space ~
29671 Here is an example:
29673 \begin_inset Formula
29687 \begin_layout Standard
29688 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29691 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
29694 arg "newline-insert newline"
29698 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
29699 one for each column.
29703 arg "newline-insert newline"
29706 in a non-empty formula,
29707 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
29708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29715 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
29716 the relation sign is in the second column,
29717 and the rest in the third column.
29718 A new row is created by every further entry of
29721 arg "newline-insert newline"
29725 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
29726 Here is an example:
29727 \begin_inset Formula
29729 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
29730 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
29735 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
29736 \begin_inset Formula
29738 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
29746 \begin_layout Standard
29747 The multi-line formula type described here is called
29754 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
29755 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
29756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29758 reference "eq:asquared"
29764 The other types are described in section
29765 \begin_inset space ~
29769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29771 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29779 \begin_layout Section
29780 Formula Numbering and Referencing
29781 \begin_inset Index idx
29786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29788 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29803 \begin_inset Index idx
29808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29814 Referencing formulas
29825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29827 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29834 \begin_layout Standard
29835 To number a formula,
29836 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
29838 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29839 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29841 \begin_inset space ~
29845 \begin_inset space ~
29853 arg "math-number-toggle"
29857 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29858 within parentheses.
29859 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
29860 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
29861 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
29862 separated by a dot:
29863 \begin_inset Formula
29873 arg "math-number-toggle"
29876 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
29877 You can only number displayed formulas.
29880 \begin_layout Standard
29881 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
29884 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29885 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29887 \begin_inset space ~
29891 \begin_inset space ~
29899 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
29902 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
29903 \begin_inset Formula
29906 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
29912 To number all lines use the shortcut
29915 arg "math-number-toggle"
29921 \begin_layout Standard
29922 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29925 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
29926 A label is inserted with the menu
29928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29937 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
29938 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
29939 It is recommended that you use the suggested
29940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29951 as the first part of the label,
29952 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
29953 We inserted in the following example the label
29954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29961 in the second line:
29962 \begin_inset Formula
29964 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
29965 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29970 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29971 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29972 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29976 \begin_inset space ~
29984 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29988 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29989 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29990 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
29993 \begin_layout Standard
29994 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29997 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30005 \begin_layout Standard
30006 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
30007 's cross-reference box are described in section
30008 \begin_inset space ~
30012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30014 reference "sec:Cross-References"
30021 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
30028 \begin_layout Section
30029 User defined math macros
30030 \begin_inset Index idx
30035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30037 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30054 \begin_layout Standard
30056 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
30057 Math macros are explained in section
30060 \begin_inset space ~
30072 \begin_layout Section
30076 \begin_layout Subsection
30078 \begin_inset Index idx
30083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30085 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30102 \begin_layout Standard
30103 The standard font for text is italic,
30104 for numbers the standard is roman.
30105 To set a font in a formula,
30109 \begin_inset space ~
30117 arg "math-insert \\font"
30121 or enter its command,
30123 \begin_inset space ~
30127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30129 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30138 \begin_layout Standard
30139 \begin_inset Float table
30146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30147 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30152 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
30156 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
30164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30166 \begin_inset Tabular
30167 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
30168 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30170 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30202 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
30210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30229 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
30237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30256 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
30264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30289 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
30297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30316 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
30324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30343 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
30351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30370 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
30378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30404 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
30412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30438 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
30446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30465 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
30473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30499 \begin_layout Standard
30500 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30509 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
30531 \begin_layout Standard
30532 When you use a typeface,
30533 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
30534 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
30539 within the box will set the cursor outside,
30540 so that you have to use a non-breaking space when you need a space in the box.
30541 Here is an example where
30542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30553 denotes the set of numbers:
30554 \begin_inset Formula
30556 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
30564 \begin_layout Standard
30565 The typefaces are nestable,
30566 which can cause confusion.
30579 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
30583 \begin_inset Newline newline
30586 So it is better not to use this feature.
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30590 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
30592 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
30596 \begin_inset Newline newline
30599 You can only print them emboldened using the command
30606 which works like the other typeface commands:
30608 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
30614 \begin_layout Standard
30621 works for all symbols,
30626 \begin_layout Standard
30627 A number of other font options are available as well,
30630 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30631 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30633 \begin_inset space ~
30641 \begin_layout Subsection
30643 \begin_inset Index idx
30648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30650 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 \begin_layout Standard
30668 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
30670 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
30671 which is obtained using the entry
30674 \begin_inset space ~
30678 \begin_inset space ~
30686 \begin_inset space ~
30694 arg "math-insert \\font"
30698 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30699 in black instead of blue.
30700 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
30701 Here is an example:
30702 \begin_inset Formula
30705 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
30706 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
30715 \begin_layout Subsection
30717 \begin_inset Index idx
30722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30724 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30741 \begin_layout Standard
30742 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
30743 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
30764 For most characters,
30773 are actually the same size,
30775 superscripts and subscripts,
30776 and certain other structures,
30782 Except for some operators,
30783 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
30784 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30785 thinks are appropriate.
30786 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
30789 arg "math-insert \\style"
30793 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
30796 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
30800 which is normally in
30811 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
30815 The four styles are used in the following example:
30818 \begin_layout Standard
30819 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
30824 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
30829 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
30834 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
30840 \begin_layout Standard
30841 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
30843 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30845 \begin_inset space ~
30851 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
30853 if the base font size of the document is changed,
30854 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
30855 As an example here is a formula in the font size
30856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30866 \begin_layout Standard
30870 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
30876 \begin_layout Section
30877 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
30879 \begin_inset Index idx
30884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30891 \begin_inset Index idx
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30898 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30917 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
30920 \begin_layout Subsection
30921 Enabling AMS-Support
30924 \begin_layout Standard
30925 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by setting
30939 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30943 \begin_inset Index idx
30948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30950 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30967 \begin_inset space ~
30973 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
30974 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30975 -errors in formulas,
30976 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
30979 \begin_layout Subsection
30981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30983 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
30988 \begin_inset Index idx
30993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30995 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30999 Multi-line Equations
31012 \begin_layout Standard
31013 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
31014 provides a selection of different formula types.
31016 allows you to choose between
31041 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
31043 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31051 for an explanation of these formula types.
31054 \begin_layout Chapter
31058 \begin_layout Section
31060 \begin_inset Index idx
31065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31074 name "sec:Cross-References"
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31082 One of \SpecialChar LyX
31083 's strengths is cross-references.
31084 You can reference every section,
31088 and list in the document.
31089 To reference a document part,
31090 you have to insert a label into it.
31091 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
31092 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
31095 \begin_layout Enumerate
31099 \begin_layout Enumerate
31100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31102 name "enu:Second-item"
31109 \begin_layout Enumerate
31113 \begin_layout Standard
31114 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
31116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31119 or by pressing the toolbar button
31126 A gray label box like this:
31128 \begin_inset Graphics
31129 filename clipart/label.png
31133 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
31135 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
31136 in our case the text
31137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31170 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
31172 if you insert a label into a section heading,
31173 the suggested prefix will be
31174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31188 \begin_layout Standard
31189 To reference the item,
31190 we refer to its label using the menu
31192 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31195 or the toolbar button
31198 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
31202 A gray cross-reference box like this:
31204 \begin_inset Graphics
31205 filename clipart/reference.png
31209 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
31210 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
31211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31223 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
31226 \begin_layout Standard
31227 As an alternative to
31229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31233 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
31238 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
31240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31252 \begin_layout Standard
31253 Here is our cross-reference:
31255 \begin_inset space ~
31259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31261 reference "enu:Second-item"
31269 \begin_layout Standard
31270 It is recommended to use a non-breaking space
31274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31275 described in section
31276 \begin_inset space ~
31280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31282 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
31292 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
31295 \begin_layout Standard
31296 There are eight formats of cross-references:
31299 \begin_layout Description
31302 this is the default:
31304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31306 reference "fig:Two-images"
31314 \begin_layout Description
31316 prints the number within two parentheses,
31317 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
31318 especially when the reference name
31319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31330 reference "eq:tanhExp"
31338 \begin_layout Description
31340 prints the page number:
31342 \begin_inset space ~
31346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31347 LatexCommand pageref
31348 reference "fig:Two-images"
31356 \begin_layout Description
31358 \begin_inset space ~
31362 \begin_inset space ~
31366 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
31368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31369 LatexCommand vpageref
31370 reference "fig:Two-images"
31376 \begin_inset Newline newline
31379 If the label is on the same page,
31380 it prints “on this page”;
31381 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
31382 it prints “on the facing page”;
31383 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
31384 it prints “on the previous page”;
31385 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
31386 it prints “on the next page”.
31387 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
31390 \begin_layout Description
31392 \begin_inset space ~
31396 \begin_inset space ~
31400 \begin_inset space ~
31405 the text “on page” and the page number:
31407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31409 reference "fig:Two-images"
31415 \begin_inset Newline newline
31418 If the label is on the same page,
31419 this format behaves like
31426 otherwise it behaves like
31430 \begin_inset space ~
31434 \begin_inset space ~
31443 \begin_layout Description
31445 \begin_inset space ~
31449 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
31450 \begin_inset Newline newline
31454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31463 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31473 \begin_inset Index idx
31478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31481 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31496 \begin_inset Index idx
31501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31504 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31524 \begin_inset Newline newline
31527 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
31528 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
31530 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
31534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31535 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31543 is the default and preferred because
31547 supports only English documents.
31548 The format is specified by using the command
31552 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31561 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31562 preamble of the document.
31563 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
31564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31580 \begin_inset Newline newline
31587 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
31592 \begin_inset Newline newline
31603 predefines reference formats for all available types.
31604 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
31605 So if you want to make formatted references to,
31608 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
31614 you might do so as follows:
31615 \begin_inset Newline newline
31622 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
31623 format{prop}{Proposition
31628 \begin_inset Newline newline
31631 For more information about defining formatted references,
31632 have a look at the package documentation
31633 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31635 key "prettyref,refstyle"
31641 \begin_inset Newline newline
31652 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
31657 \begin_inset Newline newline
31660 If you activate the option
31662 Format cross-references in work area
31666 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
31669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31677 rather than just displaying the label.
31680 \begin_layout Description
31682 \begin_inset space ~
31686 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
31688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31689 LatexCommand nameref
31690 reference "fig:Two-images"
31698 \begin_layout Description
31700 \begin_inset space ~
31704 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31705 label for the reference:
31707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31708 LatexCommand labelonly
31709 reference "fig:Two-images"
31715 \begin_inset Newline newline
31718 This allows for customization,
31719 using \SpecialChar TeX
31721 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
31728 then you may want to use the
31731 \begin_inset space ~
31737 which will output only the part of the reference following the
31738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31746 This is the form needed for e.
31747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31751 \begin_inset space \space{}
31758 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31760 The varieties are adjusted in the field
31764 of the cross-reference window,
31765 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31769 You can only use the style
31773 to reference numbered document parts,
31774 while the reference style
31778 is always possible.
31781 \begin_layout Standard
31782 If you want to reference a section,
31783 put the label in the section heading;
31784 for floats put the label in the caption;
31785 for footnotes put the label in it.
31786 Referencing formulas is explained in section
31787 \begin_inset space ~
31791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31793 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31801 \begin_layout Standard
31802 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
31806 \begin_inset space ~
31810 \begin_inset space ~
31815 sets the cursor before the referenced label (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label).
31816 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
31819 \begin_inset space ~
31824 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
31825 You can also go back with the toolbar button
31828 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
31835 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
31836 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31843 You can change labels at any time.
31844 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to change them all manually.
31847 \begin_layout Standard
31848 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
31849 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
31850 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
31853 \begin_layout Standard
31854 References are described in detail in the section
31865 \begin_layout Section
31866 Table of Contents and other Listings
31867 \begin_inset Index idx
31872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31879 \begin_inset Index idx
31884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31886 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31901 \begin_inset Index idx
31906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31922 \begin_layout Subsection
31924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31926 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
31933 \begin_layout Standard
31934 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
31936 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31937 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31939 \begin_inset space ~
31943 \begin_inset space ~
31949 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
31951 If you click on it,
31957 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
31958 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
31959 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
31961 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
31963 \begin_inset space ~
31968 that is described in section
31969 \begin_inset space ~
31973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31975 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
31983 \begin_layout Standard
31984 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
31985 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
31986 as described in section
31987 \begin_inset space ~
31991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31993 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
31999 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
32001 \begin_inset space ~
32005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32007 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
32012 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
32013 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
32016 \begin_layout Subsection
32019 Listings and Algorithms
32020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32022 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
32029 \begin_layout Standard
32032 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
32033 You can insert them via the
32035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32036 List/Contents/References
32039 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
32042 \begin_layout Section
32043 URLs and Hyperlinks
32044 \begin_inset Index idx
32049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32056 \begin_inset Index idx
32061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32070 \begin_layout Subsection
32072 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32081 \begin_layout Standard
32082 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
32084 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32090 \begin_layout Standard
32091 Here is an example URL:
32095 \begin_inset Flex URL
32098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32100 https://www.lyx.org
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32110 the URL text will always be in the style
32115 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
32117 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32118 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32124 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32130 \begin_layout Standard
32154 (use whatever the current text font is).
32155 To have italicized URLs,
32159 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32171 \begin_layout Standard
32172 URLs will break between lines at certain characters,
32176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32188 It does not break at a hyphen (
32193 but you can change that by adding
32199 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32200 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32201 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
32202 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
32206 If this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
32207 a last resort is to put
32215 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32216 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32220 this will cause URLs to be broken at every character.
32223 \begin_layout Standard
32224 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32233 URLs must not end with a backslash,
32234 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
32243 \begin_layout Subsection
32245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32247 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
32254 \begin_layout Standard
32255 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
32257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32260 or with the toolbar button
32267 The appearing dialog has two fields:
32277 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
32278 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
32280 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32282 name "LyX's homepage"
32283 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32289 an Email address like this:
32291 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32293 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
32294 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
32301 a link to a file or any other valid URI (such as
32310 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32318 \begin_layout Standard
32319 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
32320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32331 to the link target,
32332 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons.
32335 \begin_layout Standard
32336 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
32337 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
32338 To set the format of the link text,
32339 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
32340 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
32345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32347 name "LyX's homepage"
32348 target "https://www.lyx.org"
32356 \begin_layout Standard
32357 The link text color can be changed,
32362 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
32364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32365 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32369 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
32370 \begin_inset Newline newline
32378 \begin_inset Newline newline
32385 in the PDF Properties dialog.
32388 \begin_layout Standard
32389 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
32390 you can use context menu (or directly via
32392 Ctrl + right mouse button
32397 \begin_layout Section
32399 \begin_inset Index idx
32404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32413 name "sec:Counters"
32420 \begin_layout Standard
32421 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32422 is its ability to manage counters.
32424 this is handled automatically,
32425 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
32426 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
32427 using the counter inset,
32428 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
32429 This allows one to set a counter's value;
32430 to reset it (to zero);
32434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32435 Note that the section counter,
32437 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
32439 if you want the next section to be section five,
32441 then you need to set the section counter to four.
32446 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
32447 since the value added can be negative);
32449 to restore the saved value;
32450 and to print the value.
32451 These effects can also be limited to \SpecialChar LyX
32453 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
32454 as well as in \SpecialChar LaTeX
32458 \begin_layout Standard
32459 There are five commands you can use:
32462 \begin_layout Enumerate
32468 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
32471 \begin_layout Enumerate
32477 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
32478 if you choose a negative number)
32481 \begin_layout Enumerate
32487 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
32490 \begin_layout Enumerate
32493 Save value of counter:
32496 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
32499 \begin_layout Enumerate
32502 Restore value of counter:
32505 Restores the previously saved value.
32508 \begin_layout Standard
32509 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
32512 \begin_layout Section
32514 \begin_inset Index idx
32519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32528 name "sec:Appendices"
32535 \begin_layout Standard
32536 Appendices are created with the menu
32538 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32540 \begin_inset space ~
32544 \begin_inset space ~
32550 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
32551 This part is marked with a red borderline.
32554 \begin_layout Standard
32555 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
32556 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
32557 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
32558 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
32562 \begin_layout Standard
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32570 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
32580 \begin_inset space ~
32584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32586 reference "subsec:Export"
32594 \begin_layout Section
32596 \begin_inset Index idx
32601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32610 name "sec:Bibliography"
32617 \begin_layout Standard
32618 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
32620 You can include a bibliography database,
32621 which is explained in sec.
32622 \begin_inset space ~
32626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32628 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32637 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
32638 using the paragraph environment
32643 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
32644 \begin_inset space ~
32648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32650 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
32656 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
32657 such as author-year citations,
32658 and if you have more than a handful of references,
32659 then you should seriously consider
32663 using a bibliography database.
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32667 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
32668 we use two bibliographies in this document,
32673 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
32675 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
32677 the database approach relieves you,
32678 amongst other things,
32679 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
32682 \begin_layout Subsection
32683 The Bibliography Environment
32684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32686 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32693 \begin_layout Standard
32699 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
32700 If you click on it,
32701 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
32710 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
32711 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
32712 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
32716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32718 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32721 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
32727 \begin_inset Newline newline
32731 \begin_inset Flex URL
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32736 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
32747 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32757 a short form of its title,
32759 \begin_inset Newline newline
32767 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
32772 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32780 \begin_layout Standard
32781 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
32783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32786 or the toolbar button
32789 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
32793 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
32794 Select one or more keys from the list and
32804 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
32805 If you click on the box,
32806 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
32809 \begin_layout Standard
32810 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
32811 Here are two examples;
32812 the first without a label,
32813 the second with the label
32814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32824 \begin_layout Standard
32828 Companion Second Edition
32832 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32834 key "latexcompanion"
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32843 The \SpecialChar LyX
32844 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
32846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32856 \begin_layout Standard
32857 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
32858 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32864 \begin_inset Index idx
32869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32872 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32896 in the document settings
32897 \begin_inset Index idx
32902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32904 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32920 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
32922 \begin_inset space ~
32928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32930 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
32939 Once you have done that,
32942 Bibliography item settings
32944 dialog has three input fields instead of the
32963 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
32964 the second the year (without parentheses).
32965 These two are madatory.
32966 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
32972 ) and in abrreviated form (
32977 add the abbreviated form to
32981 and the full list to the optional
32986 If specified like this,
32987 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles in the
32989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33006 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list.
33007 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
33008 In the bibliography entry,
33009 author and year must be added manually.
33012 \begin_layout Standard
33013 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
33015 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33017 \begin_inset space ~
33025 arg "layout-paragraph"
33029 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
33032 \begin_layout Subsection
33033 Bibliography databases
33034 \begin_inset Index idx
33039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33041 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33058 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33065 \begin_layout Standard
33066 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
33070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
33072 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
33077 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
33078 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
33079 This database can be used for different documents,
33080 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
33081 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
33084 \begin_layout Standard
33085 The database is a text file with the file extension
33086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33098 containing the bibliography in a special format.
33099 The format is explained in
33100 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33107 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33109 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33111 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
33117 The file can be created using any text editor,
33118 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
33119 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
33121 \begin_inset Flex URL
33124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33126 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
33134 \begin_layout Standard
33136 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
33137 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33138 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
33139 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
33140 But it has its drawbacks,
33141 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
33142 Those are addressed by
33147 \begin_inset Index idx
33152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33155 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33170 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33171 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33182 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33184 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33185 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
33195 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
33198 \begin_layout Standard
33199 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33205 set in the document settings (menu
33207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33211 \begin_inset Index idx
33216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33218 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33244 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33253 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33255 \begin_inset Index idx
33260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33262 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33266 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33280 \begin_layout Standard
33281 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33286 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33288 \begin_inset space ~
33294 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33302 Add bibliography to TOC
33304 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
33309 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
33314 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
33315 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
33318 \begin_layout Standard
33319 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33320 style file is a text file with the file extension
33321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33332 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
33333 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33334 distribution should provide several of these,
33335 and many publishers provide their own style files,
33336 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
33337 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
33338 but this is something for experts.
33342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33343 For information on how this is done,
33345 \begin_inset Newline newline
33349 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33351 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
33361 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33367 which provides an alpha-numeric style.
33370 \begin_layout Standard
33371 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
33374 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33376 \begin_inset Index idx
33381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33398 \begin_inset Index idx
33403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33406 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 \begin_layout Standard
33424 Accessing a database via
33428 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33433 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33435 \begin_inset space ~
33441 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33442 you cannot select a
33446 file at this place.
33447 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33450 note the following.
33453 \begin_layout Standard
33458 has two different style files:
33459 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
33460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33468 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33471 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
33472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33483 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
33484 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
33485 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
33488 \begin_layout Standard
33493 styles are not set in the
33496 \begin_inset space ~
33502 but in the document settings.
33503 \begin_inset Index idx
33508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33510 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33525 in the dialog in the
33530 which is only visible if you use
33535 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
33536 These options are described in detail in the
33542 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33552 \begin_layout Standard
33553 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
33554 \begin_inset space ~
33558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33560 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33571 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33572 Bibliography Processors
33575 \begin_layout Standard
33576 To generate the bibliography from a database,
33578 uses a bibliography processor,
33579 that is an external program that reads the database,
33580 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
33581 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33583 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
33584 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
33588 \begin_layout Standard
33590 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
33591 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
33592 You can do this on a general level in
33594 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33595 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33596 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33599 or for individual documents in
33601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33602 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33606 The following variants are available by default:
33609 \begin_layout Description
33612 \begin_inset Index idx
33617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33620 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33634 developed exclusively for
33638 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33644 provides full Unicode support,
33645 unlimited memory and many specific features
33655 it is strongly recommended to use
33662 \begin_layout Description
33663 bibtex the standard;
33664 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
33666 works with all bibliography packages,
33667 although it will probably fail with
33671 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
33674 \begin_layout Description
33675 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
33681 works with all bibliography packages,
33682 although more complex
33686 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
33691 features are supported.
33694 \begin_layout Standard
33695 By default (with the
33701 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33702 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33715 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33716 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33717 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33722 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
33735 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33736 -based bibliography styles).
33737 This should suit most needs.
33740 \begin_layout Standard
33741 In Japanese documents,
33742 a specific processor is used.
33743 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
33744 (in \SpecialChar LyX
33750 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33751 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
33752 You can adjust it in
33754 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33755 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33756 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
33762 \begin_layout Standard
33763 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
33764 Before adding options,
33765 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33772 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33786 \begin_layout Standard
33788 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
33789 These are explained in detail in section
33791 Customizing Bibliographies
33795 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33800 Additional Features
33802 manual.Citation Format
33803 \begin_inset Index idx
33808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33827 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
33834 \begin_layout Standard
33835 Many different citation formats are common,
33837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33841 \begin_inset space \space{}
33844 numerical citation (as
33845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33852 like in this document),
33853 alpha-numerical citations (as
33854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33861 ) or author-year citations (as
33862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33871 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
33874 \begin_layout Standard
33875 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
33878 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33879 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33883 \begin_inset Index idx
33888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33890 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33904 you have a range of other options,
33905 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
33910 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
33914 \begin_inset space ~
33925 \begin_inset space ~
33930 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
33931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33933 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33942 With a bibliography database (see
33943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33945 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
33953 ) one has in contrary to the
33957 environment full access to the formatting styles.
33958 These style formats are available:
33961 \begin_layout Description
33963 \begin_inset space ~
33966 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33967 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
33970 \begin_layout Description
33971 Biblatex loads the package
33976 \begin_inset Index idx
33981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33984 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33998 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
34000 Biblatex citation style
34004 Biblatex bibliography style
34007 Options to the package
34011 can be entered in the
34018 \begin_layout Description
34020 \begin_inset space ~
34024 \begin_inset space ~
34027 mode) loads the package
34031 with the natbib compatibility mode.
34032 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
34043 behavior very closely.
34048 this option has some additional styles.
34053 styles are also supported by this variant.
34056 \begin_layout Description
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34061 (BibTeX) loads the package
34066 \begin_inset Index idx
34071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34074 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34088 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
34091 \begin_layout Description
34093 \begin_inset space ~
34096 (BibTeX) loads the package
34101 \begin_inset Index idx
34106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34109 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34123 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34135 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
34136 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
34146 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
34148 Whether the output uses numerical,
34149 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
34151 Biblatex citation style
34155 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
34156 a suitable style is proposed.
34163 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
34166 \begin_layout Standard
34167 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
34168 multiple style variants are available in the
34173 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
34174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34189 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
34190 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34194 \begin_inset space \space{}
34198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34210 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
34212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34216 \begin_inset space \space{}
34220 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
34221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34225 \begin_inset space \space{}
34229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34241 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34253 \begin_inset space ~
34259 Here is a simple example where the text
34260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34264 \begin_inset space ~
34268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34271 appears after the reference:
34274 \begin_layout Quote
34276 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34279 key "latexcompanion"
34287 \begin_layout Standard
34288 All styles except for
34292 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
34293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34301 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
34302 if the style requires this.
34305 \begin_layout Standard
34306 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
34307 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
34308 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
34309 the postnote will follow the last.
34314 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
34315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34318 qualified citation lists
34319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34325 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
34329 dialog will display three columns in the field
34337 \begin_inset space ~
34346 \begin_inset space ~
34354 \begin_inset space ~
34360 If you double-click on an item's
34363 \begin_inset space ~
34371 \begin_inset space ~
34377 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
34380 General text before
34386 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
34389 \begin_layout Subsection
34390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34392 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
34396 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
34400 \begin_layout Standard
34402 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
34405 \begin_inset space ~
34409 \begin_inset space ~
34413 \begin_inset space ~
34417 \begin_inset space ~
34420 Content\SpecialChar ldots
34423 context menu if specific conditions are met:
34426 \begin_layout Itemize
34427 If citation entries include any of the fields
34428 \begin_inset Flex Code
34431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34438 \begin_inset Flex Code
34441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34447 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
34449 \begin_inset Flex Code
34452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34458 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
34463 \begin_inset Flex Code
34466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34473 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
34476 \begin_layout Itemize
34477 If citation entries include any of the fields
34478 \begin_inset Flex Code
34481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 (filled by JabRef and Zotero) or
34488 \begin_inset Flex Code
34491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
34498 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
34499 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
34502 \begin_layout Standard
34503 In addition to that,
34509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34510 By default we provide python script
34511 \begin_inset Flex Code
34514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34521 but you can use any modified script by setting
34522 \begin_inset Flex Code
34525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34528 citation_search_view
34533 variable in the file
34537 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
34539 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
34543 The default setting is to be found in the file
34547 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
34552 your disk for matching files if you enable
34554 Search drive for cited files
34558 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34559 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
34560 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34565 It uses the tokens supplied at
34569 in the same preferences section (by default:
34574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34575 Provided by token sequence
34576 \begin_inset Flex Code
34579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34580 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
34586 Note that some constituents (
34587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34604 commas) are automatically stripped from the result.
34610 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the name of the file (at arbitrary position).
34612 opens the first matching file it finds.
34613 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
34614 the more systematic your file naming is,
34615 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
34616 the greater the chance this works for you.
34619 \begin_layout Standard
34620 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
34621 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
34623 \begin_inset Flex Code
34626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 \begin_inset Flex Code
34636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34643 but there are also special keys,
34644 which are documented in the
34646 Customization manual
34652 Cite format description
34657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34658 Security implications
34661 \begin_layout Standard
34662 Note that any document (or mainly
34663 \begin_inset Flex Code
34666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34672 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
34675 \begin_layout Standard
34676 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
34677 but beware what you are doing).
34680 \begin_layout Section
34682 \begin_inset Index idx
34687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34703 \begin_layout Standard
34704 An index entry is created if you use the menu
34706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34708 \begin_inset space ~
34713 or the toolbar button
34720 \begin_inset space ~
34724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34726 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
34731 for some advanced methods).
34732 A collapsible inset with green label is inserted;
34733 this holds the text that appears in the index (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
34736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34743 index inset in the heading above for example).
34744 The word where the cursor is in,
34745 or the currently highlighted text,
34746 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
34748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34752 copied into the inset).
34755 \begin_layout Standard
34756 The index list (which prints out the index in your document) is inserted via the menu
34758 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34759 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34761 \begin_inset space ~
34767 A light blue box labeled
34768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34779 will show the place where the index will be printed.
34781 the index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
34783 as there are no settings to make.
34784 This changes if you select
34785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34788 Use multiple indexes
34789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34793 \begin_inset space ~
34797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34799 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
34809 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
34812 \begin_layout Standard
34814 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
34816 you can customize index entries to look different.
34817 You can group index entries hierarchically,
34818 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
34819 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
34820 or additionally to,
34822 you can format the page reference (e.
34823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34827 make it bold for specific pages),
34828 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
34829 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
34831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34843 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 We describe these features in turn in the next subsections.
34848 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34849 's index mechanism,
34850 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34852 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34854 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
34862 \begin_layout Subsection
34863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34865 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
34869 Grouping Index Entries
34870 \begin_inset Index idx
34875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34877 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34894 \begin_layout Standard
34895 Index entries are often hierarchically grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index and to hold categories together (e.g.,
34901 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34908 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34915 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
34918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34919 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
34929 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
34930 Maximally two such subentry insets,
34932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34936 three levels of grouping in total,
34937 are allowed per index entry.
34938 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
34939 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
34940 In the \SpecialChar LyX
34942 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
34947 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34956 \begin_layout Standard
34958 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
34959 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry).
34962 \begin_layout Standard
34963 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
34965 subentries are indicated by a preceding exclamation mark character
34966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34974 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
34976 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
34978 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
34980 \begin_inset space ~
34984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34986 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
34995 \begin_layout Subsection
34997 \begin_inset Index idx
35002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35004 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35021 \begin_layout Standard
35023 an index entry refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted.
35024 If you want to refer to a page range instead,
35025 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
35026 one that marks the beginning of the range,
35027 the other that marks its end.
35028 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
35029 To mark start and end,
35030 select the respective
35034 option in the index inset settings dialog.
35035 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
35036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35054 \begin_layout Standard
35055 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
35056 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
35057 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
35060 \begin_layout Subsection
35062 \begin_inset Index idx
35067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35069 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35086 \begin_layout Standard
35087 It is also possible to refer to another index entry rather than,
35090 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
35092 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35104 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
35105 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35117 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
35118 \begin_inset space ~
35122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35124 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
35131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35146 \begin_layout Standard
35147 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
35150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35151 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35157 \begin_layout Standard
35158 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
35161 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35162 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35174 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
35175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35193 \begin_layout Subsection
35194 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35196 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35201 \begin_inset Index idx
35206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35208 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35225 \begin_layout Standard
35226 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
35227 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
35231 ) if you use accented characters in the index entry or if you use macros.
35234 \begin_layout Standard
35235 To accommodate for that,
35238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35239 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
35243 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
35244 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
35246 you can pass the sort key
35247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35258 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
35261 \begin_layout Standard
35262 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35264 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
35265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35273 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
35275 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
35277 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
35279 \begin_inset space ~
35283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35285 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35293 \begin_layout Subsection
35294 Index Entry Formatting
35295 \begin_inset Index idx
35300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35302 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35319 \begin_layout Standard
35320 The appearance of index entries can be formatted as usual via the text style dialog,
35321 the toolbar or shortcuts.
35322 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry.
35323 \begin_inset Index idx
35328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35330 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35336 This is an italic dummy entry
35346 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
35348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35361 will be listed separately.
35365 \begin_layout Standard
35366 To format a page reference,
35371 option in the index entry settings dialog.
35372 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
35392 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
35399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35403 a self-defined command
35404 \begin_inset Flex Code
35407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35413 or an existing macro such as
35414 \begin_inset Flex Code
35417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35426 \begin_layout Standard
35428 we encourage you to use self-defined commands.
35429 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
35430 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
35432 add a formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined by putting the following in the preamble
35435 \begin_layout Standard
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35448 and add the custom formatting
35449 \begin_inset Flex Code
35452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35458 to the respective entry settings dialog.
35461 \begin_layout Standard
35462 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
35463 If you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
35464 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
35465 not every single index entry.
35468 \begin_layout Standard
35469 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35478 If you use the index processor
35484 makeindex or xindex
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35493 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
35499 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
35504 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
35505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35512 (style file) you use before they can be used.
35514 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
35517 \begin_layout Verbatim
35519 (markup-locref :open "
35521 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
35524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35526 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35529 key "latexcompanion"
35542 \begin_layout Standard
35543 You can also change the layout of the whole index.
35545 if you mark the index list box as bold,
35546 you will get a bold font for all index entries.
35549 it is better (and required for more advanced tasks) to set up a so-called
35574 ) to determine the formatting;
35575 please refer to the
35588 documentations for details,
35590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35592 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
35598 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35599 packages available that ease such formatting,
35601 \begin_inset Flex URL
35604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35606 https://ctan.org/topic/index
35614 \begin_layout Subsection
35615 Special Characters in Index Entries
35616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35618 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
35625 \begin_layout Standard
35626 As already mentioned above,
35627 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
35630 \begin_inset Flex Code
35633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35641 \begin_inset Flex Code
35644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35652 \begin_inset Flex Code
35655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35656 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35666 \begin_inset Flex Code
35669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35676 If you use them literally,
35677 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
35679 you will not get the character itself.
35682 \begin_layout Standard
35683 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
35685 \begin_inset Quotes els
35689 \begin_inset Quotes ers
35693 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
35695 the escape character is
35696 \begin_inset Flex Code
35699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35700 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35708 (but this can be changed).
35710 \begin_inset Flex Code
35713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35714 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35724 \begin_inset Flex Code
35727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35728 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35738 \begin_inset Flex Code
35741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35742 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35746 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
35756 \begin_inset Flex Code
35759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35760 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35768 to get the special character you want.
35769 Note that the escape character,
35771 \begin_inset Flex Code
35774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35775 \begin_inset Quotes qld
35788 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35795 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35803 \begin_layout Subsection
35804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35806 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
35810 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
35813 \begin_layout Standard
35814 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
35815 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
35816 This is not only time-consuming,
35817 but also error-prone;
35819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35823 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
35825 provides some functions to ease the task.
35828 \begin_layout Standard
35830 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
35831 you can open the outliner via
35833 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35843 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
35853 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
35854 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
35859 it will be more easier),
35864 -click on the entry and select
35866 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
35868 from the context menu.
35869 This will do just what it says:
35870 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
35873 \begin_layout Standard
35876 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
35877 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
35878 you can select from the context menu
35880 Index All Occurrences of this Word
35883 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
35884 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
35885 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
35886 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
35890 is the word before the index entry,
35895 will be considered as well,
35901 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
35903 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
35904 but only relevant occurrences!
35905 So as convenient as this function might seem,
35906 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
35908 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
35911 \begin_layout Subsection
35913 \begin_inset Index idx
35918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35920 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35937 name "subsec:Index-Program"
35944 \begin_layout Standard
35945 If the index processor,
35958 for that matter) for index generation;
35959 otherwise the program
35964 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35967 As a further option,
35968 you can select the rather new
35975 \begin_layout Itemize
35981 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
35982 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
35983 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35991 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
35997 how to manually fix this sorting,
35998 but this is very tedious work).
36001 \begin_layout Itemize
36002 The alternative program,
36008 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
36009 It can sort most languages correctly,
36010 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
36016 is no longer actively maintained,
36017 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
36023 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
36024 But if you have it available,
36025 it is almost always a better option than
36032 \begin_layout Itemize
36039 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
36040 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
36041 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
36042 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
36044 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
36045 The program is still in development,
36046 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
36047 But the program is definitely worth a try,
36052 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
36055 \begin_layout Standard
36056 All processors can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
36057 's preferences dialog,
36059 \begin_inset space ~
36063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36065 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
36071 The available options are listed and explained in
36072 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36074 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
36081 you can even specify arbitrary alternative programs to generate the index.
36084 \begin_layout Standard
36085 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
36086 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
36089 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36090 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36094 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
36097 \begin_layout Subsection
36098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36100 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
36107 \begin_layout Standard
36108 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
36110 you might need to set up a separate
36111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36118 next to the standard index.
36120 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
36121 but there are packages that add this feature.
36128 \begin_inset Index idx
36133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36136 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36150 package to generate multiple indexes.
36151 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
36156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36157 If yours does not ship it,
36158 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
36161 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36169 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36171 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
36172 Please consult the package's manual for details.
36180 \begin_layout Standard
36181 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
36182 for the use of multiple indexes,
36185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36186 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36189 and select the option
36191 Use multiple Indexes
36198 already contains the standard index
36199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36207 To add further indexes,
36208 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
36212 input field and press the
36217 The new index now also appears in the list.
36219 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
36220 label color to the new index.
36223 \begin_layout Standard
36224 Once the document changes have been applied,
36225 you can find the new index list in
36227 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36228 List/Contents/References
36234 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
36235 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
36236 but there are additional features:
36239 \begin_layout Itemize
36240 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
36241 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
36244 \begin_layout Itemize
36245 By right-clicking on an index,
36246 you can change its type.
36248 you can specify an index to be a
36254 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
36256 if you use a book class,
36257 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
36258 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
36261 \begin_layout Itemize
36266 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
36267 code in the name of the index.
36270 \begin_layout Section
36271 Nomenclature/Glossary
36272 \begin_inset Index idx
36277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36284 \begin_inset Index idx
36289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36291 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
36294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36306 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36308 name "sec:Nomenclature"
36315 \begin_layout Standard
36316 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
36319 \begin_layout Standard
36320 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
36321 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36327 \begin_inset Index idx
36332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36335 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36350 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36353 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36360 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36364 \begin_layout Standard
36365 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
36367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36373 \begin_inset space ~
36378 or the toolbar button
36381 arg "nomencl-insert"
36386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36397 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
36400 \begin_layout Standard
36401 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
36402 The first is the term or
36406 that you wish to define.
36411 of the term or symbol.
36414 \begin_layout Standard
36415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36424 To use \SpecialChar TeX
36425 code for nomenclature entries the option
36429 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
36437 \begin_layout Subsection
36438 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
36439 \begin_inset Index idx
36444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36463 \begin_layout Standard
36464 If you have symbols in formulas,
36465 you have to define them in the
36469 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
36472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36476 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36485 \begin_inset Newline newline
36493 \begin_inset Newline newline
36499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36506 character starts/ends the formula.
36507 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36508 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
36509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36519 For capital Greek letters,
36520 start the command also with a capital letter,
36530 \begin_layout Standard
36531 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36532 syntax is given in section
36533 \begin_inset space ~
36537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36539 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36547 \begin_layout Standard
36551 \begin_inset space ~
36556 dialog to format the description text;
36557 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
36559 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
36560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36564 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36571 in this document is:
36572 \begin_inset Newline newline
36577 dummy entry for the character
36582 \begin_inset Newline newline
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36604 font use the command
36635 \begin_layout Standard
36636 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
36637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36641 \begin_inset space \space{}
36645 \begin_inset Newline newline
36661 \begin_inset Newline newline
36664 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
36665 This command will make the font of all symbols
36672 \begin_inset space ~
36680 \begin_layout Standard
36681 If the characters |
36682 \begin_inset space \space{}
36686 \begin_inset space \space{}
36690 \begin_inset space \space{}
36695 \begin_inset space \space{}
36699 \begin_inset space \space{}
36702 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
36703 code they need to be escaped by adding a percent character in front of them.
36704 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36705 LatexCommand nomenclature
36706 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
36707 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
36715 \begin_layout Subsection
36716 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
36717 \begin_inset Index idx
36722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36724 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36741 \begin_layout Standard
36742 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36743 -code of the symbol definition.
36744 This leads to undesired results when you,
36746 have symbols in formulas.
36747 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
36750 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36751 LatexCommand nomenclature
36753 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
36761 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36765 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
36766 LatexCommand nomenclature
36769 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
36775 They will be sorted by
36776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36802 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36805 will be sorted before the
36809 since the character
36810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36817 is considered in sorting.
36820 \begin_layout Standard
36821 To control the sort order,
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36830 field of the nomenclature dialog.
36831 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
36832 For the example given,
36837 in this field for the
36838 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36846 will be located before
36847 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
36853 \begin_layout Standard
36854 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
36860 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36870 \begin_layout Subsection
36871 Nomenclature Options
36872 \begin_inset Index idx
36877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36896 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
36903 \begin_layout Standard
36908 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
36909 Here are some of its options;
36910 for more have a look at its documentation:
36913 \begin_layout Description
36914 refeq Appends the phrase
36915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36931 to every nomenclature entry,
36938 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
36941 \begin_layout Description
36942 refpage Appends the phrase
36943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36959 to every nomenclature entry,
36966 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
36969 \begin_layout Description
36970 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
36973 \begin_layout Standard
36974 To use one or more of the options,
36975 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
36977 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36981 In this document the options
36989 \begin_layout Standard
36990 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
36996 \begin_layout Standard
36997 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
37001 field in the nomenclature dialog:
37004 \begin_layout Description
37014 \begin_layout Description
37017 nomrefpage Like the
37024 \begin_layout Description
37027 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
37036 \begin_layout Description
37040 \begin_inset space ~
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37051 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
37054 \begin_layout Standard
37056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37063 are automatically translated for most document languages.
37065 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
37069 \begin_layout Standard
37078 \begin_inset Newline newline
37084 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37088 \begin_inset space ~
37104 \begin_inset Newline newline
37111 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37112 \begin_inset Newline newline
37118 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37140 \begin_layout Standard
37141 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
37142 assure that you use
37145 \begin_inset space ~
37150 in the document settings under
37153 \begin_inset space ~
37161 \begin_layout Standard
37169 \begin_inset Newline newline
37173 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37177 \begin_inset space ~
37190 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
37192 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
37193 \begin_inset Newline newline
37200 pagedeclaration}[1]{
37201 \begin_inset Newline newline
37205 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
37208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37209 \begin_inset space ~
37222 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
37227 \begin_layout Subsection
37228 Printing the Nomenclature
37229 \begin_inset Index idx
37234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37236 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37253 \begin_layout Standard
37254 To print the nomenclature,
37257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37258 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37274 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
37275 By right-clicking on it,
37276 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
37277 You can choose between these settings:
37280 \begin_layout Description
37281 Default a space of 1
37282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37288 \begin_layout Description
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37294 \begin_inset space ~
37297 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
37300 \begin_layout Description
37301 Custom custom space
37304 \begin_layout Standard
37305 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
37306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37314 If you are not happy with the name,
37315 you can change it by redefining the command
37323 in order to change the name to
37328 add the following line to the preamble:
37331 \begin_layout Standard
37344 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
37347 \begin_layout Standard
37348 When you are using another document language than English,
37350 \begin_inset Newline newline
37366 where *** is the name of the language used.
37369 \begin_layout Subsection
37370 Nomenclature Program
37371 \begin_inset Index idx
37376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37378 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37393 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37395 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
37402 \begin_layout Standard
37409 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
37411 to generate the nomenclature.
37413 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
37419 \begin_inset space ~
37423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37425 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
37431 The available options are listed and explained in
37432 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37434 key "nomencl,makeindex"
37442 \begin_layout Section
37444 \begin_inset Index idx
37449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37456 \begin_inset Index idx
37461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37463 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37480 name "sec:Branches"
37487 \begin_layout Standard
37488 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
37489 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
37490 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
37493 \begin_layout Standard
37494 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
37495 allows you to put text into branches.
37496 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
37497 To create a branch,
37498 either select the menu
37500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37501 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
37504 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
37506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37514 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
37515 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
37516 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
37517 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
37519 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
37520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37535 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
37536 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
37539 \begin_layout Standard
37540 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
37541 These boxes are inserted via the menu
37543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37546 where you can choose a branch.
37547 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
37550 \begin_layout Standard
37551 Here is an example,
37552 where only the question text appears,
37553 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
37556 \begin_layout Standard
37557 \begin_inset Branch Question
37561 \begin_layout Standard
37567 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
37575 \begin_layout Standard
37576 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37580 \begin_layout Standard
37586 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
37594 \begin_layout Standard
37601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37602 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37606 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
37607 Consider for example a file
37608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37615 which has the above branches.
37617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37625 the PDF export file would be called
37626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37649 branch were inactive,
37651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37688 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
37689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37692 if both branches were active.
37693 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
37694 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 It is also possible to invert just some branch insets,
37702 whose content is output just in case the branch is
37706 activated (they are marked with ~ before the name).
37707 Such insets make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
37708 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
37709 right-click on the inset button and choose
37712 \begin_inset space ~
37720 \begin_layout Standard
37721 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37725 \begin_layout Standard
37732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37739 branch is deactivated.
37745 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37752 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
37753 like inside equations,
37754 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
37755 definitions for each branch.
37756 For example you can define for the question branch
37760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37761 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37764 \begin_inset space ~
37768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37770 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
37783 \begin_layout Standard
37793 \begin_layout Standard
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 and for the answer branch
37807 \begin_layout Standard
37817 \begin_layout Standard
37827 \begin_layout Standard
37828 \begin_inset Branch Question
37832 \begin_layout Standard
37836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37864 \begin_layout Standard
37865 \begin_inset Branch Answer
37869 \begin_layout Standard
37873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37901 \begin_layout Standard
37902 Now it is possible to use the
37906 question{\SpecialChar ldots
37913 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
37916 commands to obtain conditional output.
37917 Here is an example formula where only the
37924 \begin_inset Formula
37926 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
37934 \begin_layout Standard
37936 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
37944 \begin_layout Standard
37945 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
37946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37950 \begin_inset space \space{}
37953 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
37955 For this advanced usage,
37963 Flex insets and InsetLayout
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 In case you often need to keep all branches of a given name in sync as far as their open/close status is concerned,
37970 you can use the \SpecialChar LyX
37975 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
37976 You can bind it to a keyboard shortcut or add it to a user-defined context menu for branch insets.
37979 \begin_layout Section
37981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37983 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
37988 \begin_inset Index idx
37993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38002 \begin_layout Standard
38005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38006 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38009 allows you to set up specifics of your document's PDF output.
38010 Most of these specifics are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38016 \begin_inset Index idx
38021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38038 which you need to enable by clicking
38040 Use Hyperref Support
38042 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
38043 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
38045 Customize Hyperref Options
38048 Among other things,
38049 hyperref hyperlinks all URLs and cross-references in the PDF output.
38050 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on an URL,
38051 a table of contents entry or on a reference to open a website or to move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
38053 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
38054 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 The header information in the dialog tab
38062 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
38063 Many programs are able to extract this information,
38065 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
38066 This is very useful to sort,
38067 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
38071 \begin_inset space ~
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38081 hyperref tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
38085 \begin_inset space ~
38089 \begin_inset space ~
38093 \begin_inset space ~
38098 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
38099 which is useful for presentations.
38102 \begin_layout Standard
38107 you can customize the look of such links,
38108 and you can specify if and which bibliographical backreferences are created.
38113 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
38114 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited.
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38122 \begin_inset space ~
38126 \begin_inset space ~
38131 option allows long links to be split;
38135 \begin_inset space ~
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38143 \begin_inset space ~
38151 \begin_inset space ~
38156 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38165 colors the different links.
38166 The default colors are:
38169 \begin_layout Labeling
38170 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38175 for hyperlinks and URLs
38178 \begin_layout Labeling
38179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38187 \begin_layout Labeling
38188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
38196 \begin_layout Standard
38197 but you can change these in the tab
38203 in this document they were changed with these additional options added to
38210 \begin_layout Quote
38219 \begin_layout Standard
38224 you can specify if PDF bookmarks (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader) should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
38225 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
38230 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
38235 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
38237 \begin_inset space ~
38240 2 will display all sections and subsections,
38242 \begin_inset space ~
38245 1 will only display the sections (collapsing the rest).
38248 \begin_layout Standard
38253 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
38254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38261 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
38262 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
38263 \begin_inset Flex Code
38266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38275 not via the package options.
38276 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
38277 If you need to use one of those options,
38278 you can set them by adding
38281 \begin_layout Quote
38284 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option2
38287 \begin_layout Standard
38290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38291 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38294 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
38297 \begin_layout Standard
38302 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
38304 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
38305 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
38306 input is simply ignored).
38307 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
38313 At the point of writing this,
38314 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
38316 documentmetadata-support.pdf
38319 but it is expected that in the future,
38320 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
38323 \begin_layout Section
38325 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38329 name "sec:TeX-Code"
38336 \begin_layout Subsection
38339 \begin_inset Index idx
38344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38354 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38362 As \SpecialChar LyX
38363 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
38365 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
38366 commands and constructs,
38369 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
38370 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
38371 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38372 -package for every problem,
38373 though \SpecialChar LyX
38374 cannot support all packages and their commands.
38377 \begin_layout Standard
38379 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
38380 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
38381 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
38384 Code box is created by the menu
38386 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38388 \begin_inset space ~
38393 or by the toolbar button
38406 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
38413 \begin_layout Standard
38414 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
38416 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
38419 if you want to draw a frame around a word
38423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38424 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
38429 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38437 you can write the command part
38443 in a \SpecialChar TeX
38444 Code box before the word and the closing brace
38448 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
38449 Code box behind the word.
38450 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
38451 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
38454 \begin_layout Standard
38455 \begin_inset Graphics
38456 filename clipart/ERT.png
38464 \begin_layout Standard
38468 \begin_layout Standard
38469 This is a line with a
38473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38506 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
38507 -commands without parameters,
38508 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
38509 know that the command is finished.
38517 \begin_layout Subsection
38518 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38520 \begin_inset Argument 1
38523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38524 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
38531 \begin_inset Index idx
38536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38546 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38553 \begin_layout Standard
38554 When you write larger documents or books,
38555 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38556 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
38557 uses in the background.
38558 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
38559 is based on commands,
38561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38569 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
38571 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
38572 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
38573 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
38574 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
38577 \begin_layout Standard
38578 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
38580 As mentioned above,
38581 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38583 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38586 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38596 \begin_layout Standard
38597 As result you find that the package
38602 \begin_inset Index idx
38607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38610 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38626 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
38628 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38631 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38635 \begin_inset space ~
38643 \begin_layout Standard
38648 usepackage[options]{package name}
38651 \begin_layout Standard
38652 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
38653 commands begin with a backslash,
38654 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
38655 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
38658 \begin_layout Standard
38659 In your case the package name is
38664 After a look in the documentation of the package,
38665 you know that the option
38669 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
38670 So you add the command
38673 \begin_layout Standard
38678 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
38681 \begin_layout Standard
38682 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
38686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38687 For more commands provided by the
38692 have a look at its documentation,
38694 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38709 \begin_layout Standard
38710 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
38711 For example if you use a
38716 you don't need the package
38721 you can instead write
38724 \begin_layout Standard
38729 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
38734 \begin_layout Standard
38735 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
38736 So if you plan to write a large document,
38737 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
38744 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
38747 \begin_layout Standard
38748 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
38749 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
38750 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38752 use the \SpecialChar TeX
38753 Code box as described in the previous section.
38756 \begin_layout Standard
38757 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
38759 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38761 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38763 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
38771 \begin_layout Standard
38772 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
38778 \begin_layout Standard
38782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38792 \begin_inset Note Note
38795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38796 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
38804 \begin_layout Left Header
38805 \begin_inset Argument 1
38808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38828 \begin_inset Note Note
38831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38832 defines the header line as described below
38840 \begin_layout Center Header
38841 \begin_inset Argument 1
38844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38853 \begin_layout Right Header
38854 \begin_inset Argument 1
38857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38878 \begin_layout Left Footer
38879 \begin_inset Argument 1
38882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38903 \begin_layout Center Footer
38904 \begin_inset Argument 1
38907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38919 \begin_inset Newline newline
38923 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
38929 \begin_layout Right Footer
38930 \begin_inset Argument 1
38933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38955 \begin_layout Section
38956 Customized Page Headers and Footers
38957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38959 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
38964 \begin_inset Index idx
38969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38971 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38986 \begin_inset Index idx
38991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39000 \begin_layout Standard
39001 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
39002 you need to set the
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39016 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39022 \begin_inset space ~
39028 As a second step add in the menu
39030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39040 Custom Header/Footerlines
39043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39047 This module offers the following 6
39048 \begin_inset space ~
39054 \begin_layout Description
39056 \begin_inset space ~
39060 \begin_inset space ~
39064 \begin_inset space ~
39068 \begin_inset space ~
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39078 \begin_layout Description
39080 \begin_inset space ~
39084 \begin_inset space ~
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39092 \begin_inset space ~
39096 \begin_inset space ~
39102 \begin_layout Standard
39103 for the different positions in the header/footer.
39104 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
39107 \begin_layout Standard
39109 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
39110 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
39112 \begin_inset space ~
39116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39118 reference "fig:Page-layout"
39123 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
39126 \begin_layout Standard
39127 \begin_inset Float figure
39134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39137 \begin_inset Tabular
39138 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
39139 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
39140 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39142 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
39144 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
39156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39162 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39202 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
39205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39206 The normal text on the page goes here.
39207 The running header is above the text,
39208 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
39209 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
39210 title of the chapter,
39211 company logo but you can use almost anything,
39217 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39226 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39237 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39255 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
39278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39284 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
39287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
39304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39307 name "fig:Page-layout"
39311 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
39324 \begin_layout Standard
39325 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39334 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
39337 \begin_inset space ~
39342 is set to “Default”.
39343 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
39351 \begin_layout Subsection
39355 \begin_layout Standard
39356 To define your header line,
39357 add all three header environments.
39358 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
39359 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
39360 For single-sided documents,
39361 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
39362 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
39363 nothing appears in the output.
39364 Defining the footer line works similarly.
39367 \begin_layout Standard
39368 For the definition,
39369 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39370 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
39373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39375 \begin_inset space ~
39383 \begin_layout Description
39386 thepage prints the current page number
39389 \begin_layout Description
39392 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
39395 \begin_layout Description
39398 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
39401 \begin_layout Description
39404 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
39405 If the document has chapters,
39406 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
39408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39412 \begin_inset Quotes prd
39415 because it usually goes in a left header.
39418 \begin_layout Description
39421 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
39422 If the document has chapters,
39423 it prints the current section number and title instead.
39424 It is normally used in the right header.
39427 \begin_layout Subsection
39428 Default header/footer
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
39433 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
39434 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
39435 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
39436 but leave it blank.
39438 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
39442 \begin_inset space ~
39450 \begin_layout Subsection
39454 \begin_layout Standard
39455 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
39456 Some pages are different.
39457 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
39458 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
39459 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
39460 but that is normal.
39461 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
39464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39465 Header and footer decoration line
39468 \begin_layout Standard
39471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39474 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
39475 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
39487 in the following way:
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39497 headrulewidth}{thickness}
39500 \begin_layout Standard
39501 where thickness is a size in standard units like
39514 If you don't want a line,
39515 set the thickness to 0
39516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39522 \begin_layout Standard
39523 The lines can also be colored,
39524 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
39526 If you really need this,
39527 have a look at the Internet or in section
39528 \begin_inset space ~
39532 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
39543 Several header/footer lines
39546 \begin_layout Standard
39547 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
39548 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
39550 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
39551 To expand the height,
39552 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39570 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_layout Standard
39585 headheight}{height}
39588 \begin_layout Standard
39593 is a size in standard units (e.
39594 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39598 \begin_inset space \space{}
39606 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
39607 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
39608 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39609 logfile with the menu
39611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39613 \begin_inset space ~
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39626 to see if you can find a warning about the package
39631 \begin_inset Index idx
39636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39639 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39654 If there is such a warning,
39655 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
39658 \begin_layout Subsection
39662 \begin_layout Standard
39663 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
39664 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
39665 This example consists of the following definition:
39668 \begin_layout Description
39670 \begin_inset space ~
39680 empty optional argument
39683 \begin_layout Description
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39689 empty optional argument
39692 \begin_layout Description
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39704 in the optional argument
39707 \begin_layout Description
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39719 in the optional argument
39722 \begin_layout Description
39724 \begin_inset space ~
39738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39742 \begin_inset Newline newline
39746 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
39750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39753 in the optional argument
39756 \begin_layout Description
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39768 empty optional argument
39771 \begin_layout Description
39774 headrulewidth set to 2
39775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39781 \begin_layout Standard
39782 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
39784 For more specialized features,
39787 see the manual of the
39793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39803 \begin_layout Standard
39804 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
39810 \begin_layout Standard
39814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39818 pagestyle{headings}
39824 \begin_inset Note Note
39827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39828 switches back to page style with the default headings
39836 \begin_layout Section
39837 Previewing Snippets of your Document
39838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39840 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39845 \begin_inset Index idx
39850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39857 \begin_inset Index idx
39862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39864 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39881 \begin_layout Standard
39883 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
39886 \begin_layout Subsection
39890 \begin_layout Standard
39891 To get previews working,
39892 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39898 \begin_inset Index idx
39903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39906 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39920 (on some systems named simply
39925 If it is not already installed,
39926 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39929 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39936 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39938 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
39947 for \SpecialChar LyX
39948 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39949 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
39953 \begin_layout Subsection
39957 \begin_layout Standard
39958 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
39959 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
39961 activate the option
39964 \begin_inset space ~
39971 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39984 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
39991 \begin_inset space ~
40004 \begin_inset space ~
40009 is the multiplication factor for the size.
40012 \begin_layout Standard
40013 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
40018 \begin_inset space ~
40026 \begin_inset space ~
40034 \begin_layout Standard
40035 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
40036 and when you finish editing an inset.
40039 \begin_layout Standard
40040 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40049 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
40052 \begin_inset space ~
40058 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
40066 \begin_layout Subsection
40067 Selected document parts
40070 \begin_layout Standard
40071 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
40072 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
40073 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40076 insert a preview inset via the menu
40078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40082 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
40083 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
40084 If you click on the preview,
40085 you can edit the previewed stuff.
40088 \begin_layout Standard
40090 To create rotated boxes,
40091 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40098 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
40103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40110 is explained in section
40112 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
40117 \begin_inset space ~
40127 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
40128 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
40129 the final rotated boxes,
40130 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
40131 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
40132 Here is the result:
40135 \begin_layout Standard
40136 \begin_inset Preview
40138 \begin_layout Standard
40143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40147 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
40153 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
40163 height_special "totalheight"
40168 backgroundcolor "none"
40171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40196 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
40202 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
40209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40224 \begin_layout Standard
40225 Previewing works also for colors.
40226 In this example a special framed,
40227 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40245 is explained in section
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40265 \begin_layout Standard
40266 \begin_inset Preview
40268 \begin_layout Standard
40272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40291 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
40296 This is text within a colored,
40301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40316 \begin_layout Standard
40317 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
40323 \begin_layout Standard
40324 If \SpecialChar LyX
40325 does not show a preview,
40326 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
40327 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40328 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
40330 If \SpecialChar LyX
40331 cannot create a preview,
40332 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40334 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
40335 Code and don't know if it is correct,
40336 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
40339 \begin_layout Subsection
40344 \begin_layout Standard
40345 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40346 source of the whole document or parts of it.
40349 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40356 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40358 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
40359 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
40361 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
40362 To view the whole document as source,
40363 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
40369 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
40371 but note that if you have several documents open,
40372 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
40374 not just the one which is open at the time.
40377 \begin_layout Section
40378 Advanced Find and Replace
40379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40381 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40386 \begin_inset Index idx
40391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40398 \begin_inset Index idx
40403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40412 \begin_layout Subsection
40416 \begin_layout Standard
40417 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
40418 allows for searching of complex,
40419 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
40421 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
40422 The key-features are:
40425 \begin_layout Itemize
40426 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
40427 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
40428 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
40429 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
40432 \begin_layout Itemize
40433 Search may be format-insensitive,
40434 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
40437 and even mathematics),
40438 or it may be format-sensitive,
40441 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
40444 \begin_layout Itemize
40445 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
40446 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
40449 \begin_layout Itemize
40450 Search may be widened to a specific
40456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40460 \begin_inset space ~
40463 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
40464 all the open files,
40465 or all the manuals available from the
40472 \begin_layout Itemize
40473 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
40474 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
40475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40479 \begin_inset space ~
40484 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
40487 \begin_layout Subsection
40491 \begin_layout Standard
40492 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
40494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40507 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
40510 ) or the toolbar button
40513 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
40519 Advanced Find and Replace
40524 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40528 \begin_layout Standard
40534 mini-editor a simple word,
40535 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40543 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
40546 arg "paragraph-break"
40550 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
40552 bold or normal face,
40553 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
40557 arg "paragraph-break"
40560 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
40564 searches backwards.
40567 \begin_layout Standard
40571 \begin_inset space ~
40576 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40589 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
40592 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40593 Searching for mathematics
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 Mathematical formulas,
40599 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
40602 or something more complex like
40603 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
40607 may be searched for by typing them in the
40612 When searching for a formula,
40613 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
40614 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
40615 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
40621 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40625 \begin_layout Standard
40626 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
40627 This is done by switching to the
40631 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
40644 \begin_layout Itemize
40645 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
40648 \begin_layout Itemize
40649 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
40650 and within the same text style only.
40653 \begin_layout Itemize
40654 a normal word in a section heading,
40655 and searching for it,
40656 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
40658 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
40659 in addition to a section style,
40660 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
40663 \begin_layout Itemize
40664 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
40667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40671 \begin_layout Standard
40672 The entries made in the
40676 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
40679 \begin_inset space ~
40685 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
40690 button or alternatively press
40693 arg "paragraph-break"
40700 while the cursor is in the
40703 \begin_inset space ~
40711 \begin_layout Standard
40712 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
40714 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
40717 \begin_layout Itemize
40718 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
40719 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
40720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40727 with its typewriter version
40728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40742 \begin_layout Itemize
40743 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
40744 for example replacing occurrences of
40745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40749 \begin_inset Formula $R$
40753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40761 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
40765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40768 (you may want to enable the
40771 \begin_inset space ~
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40784 options and disable the
40793 in order to avoid replacing all
40794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40801 letters occurring in normal text),
40803 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
40807 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
40812 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
40816 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
40822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
40826 \begin_layout Standard
40827 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
40831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40832 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
40834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40836 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
40846 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
40851 This is done with the context menu
40853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40854 Insert Regular Expression
40856 while the cursor is in the
40861 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40866 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
40869 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40876 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
40878 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
40884 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
40885 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
40886 Examples of using such a feature may be:
40889 \begin_layout Enumerate
40890 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
40896 editor the fraction
40897 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
40901 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40904 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
40907 \begin_layout Enumerate
40908 Searching for all text with a given style:
40912 Adhere to search string formatting of
40918 button in this section pressed,
40922 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40927 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
40928 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
40931 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
40934 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
40935 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
40936 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
40940 \begin_layout Description
40941 Language Allows searching for text in specific language (relevant here is,
40942 as with the other options,
40943 the setting of the search string)
40946 \begin_layout Description
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40951 color colored text like cyan,
40956 \begin_layout Description
40958 \begin_inset space ~
40966 \begin_layout Description
40968 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_layout Description
40977 \begin_inset space ~
40986 \begin_layout Description
40988 \begin_inset space ~
40997 \begin_layout Description
40998 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
41003 \begin_layout Description
41010 \begin_layout Description
41011 Strike-through Single,
41015 \begin_layout Description
41016 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
41019 \begin_layout Description
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41033 \begin_layout Standard
41035 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
41036 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
41037 \begin_inset Formula $()$
41041 and referring back to them through
41042 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
41047 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
41053 try searching with the regexp
41054 \begin_inset Newline newline
41068 \begin_inset Newline newline
41071 in order to find word repetitions,
41075 \begin_layout Standard
41076 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) fully implemented.
41079 \begin_layout Standard
41080 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41089 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
41090 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
41091 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
41093 \begin_inset space ~
41097 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
41100 always refers to the first occurrence of
41101 \begin_inset Formula $()$
41104 in all entered regexps.
41112 \begin_layout Section
41114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41116 name "sec:Spellchecking"
41121 \begin_inset Index idx
41126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41135 \begin_layout Standard
41137 has a built-in spell checker.
41140 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41148 key or the toolbar button
41151 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41154 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
41155 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
41156 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
41157 Whenever an unknown word is found,
41158 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
41159 In the spellchecker sidebar,
41160 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
41161 if any could be found.
41162 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
41167 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
41168 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
41171 \begin_layout Standard
41173 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
41175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41179 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
41181 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
41182 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41193 arg "dialog-show character"
41196 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
41198 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
41201 \begin_layout Standard
41202 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
41203 can be downloaded from here:
41204 \begin_inset Newline newline
41208 \begin_inset Flex URL
41211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41213 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/dictionaries/dicts/
41219 \begin_inset Newline newline
41222 You should download 2
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41226 files for each language (use
41230 link at the end of the opened webpage).
41231 To install a dictionary on Windows,
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41236 files into \SpecialChar LyX
41237 's installation subfolder
41245 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41247 \begin_inset Newline newline
41250 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
41251 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
41252 but in most cases these are
41272 is the language code.
41275 \begin_layout Subsection
41279 \begin_layout Standard
41282 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41283 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41288 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41291 you can set the following things:
41294 \begin_layout Description
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41299 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
41300 should use for spell checking.
41301 Depending on your platform,
41312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41313 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
41314 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41332 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
41335 \begin_layout Description
41337 \begin_inset space ~
41340 language If this field is not empty,
41342 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
41343 no matter what the document language is.
41346 \begin_layout Description
41348 \begin_inset space ~
41351 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
41353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41357 \begin_inset space \space{}
41361 This should normally not be needed.
41364 \begin_layout Description
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41373 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
41374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41389 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
41390 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
41391 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
41392 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
41393 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
41396 \begin_layout Description
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41409 comments If enabled,
41410 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
41413 \begin_layout Section
41415 \begin_inset Index idx
41420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41429 name "sec:Thesaurus"
41436 \begin_layout Standard
41438 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
41439 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
41440 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
41448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41449 \begin_inset CommandInset href
41451 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
41462 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
41466 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
41467 which are available for many languages.
41470 \begin_layout Standard
41471 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
41475 \begin_layout Subsection
41476 Setting up the thesaurus
41479 \begin_layout Standard
41488 thesauri consist of two files per language:
41489 A file with the suffix
41493 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
41498 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
41499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41503 \begin_inset space ~
41512 the US English files are named:
41515 \begin_layout Itemize
41519 \begin_layout Itemize
41523 \begin_layout Standard
41532 and its thesaurus installed,
41533 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
41536 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41537 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41538 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41540 \begin_inset space ~
41545 ) to the path where they are installed.
41549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
41552 typical locations are
41559 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
41564 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
41569 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
41573 dictionaries are to be found at
41579 LibreOffice-<Version>
41587 the default location is
41589 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
41590 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41591 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
41592 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
41593 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41594 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
41603 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
41604 installation process,
41605 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
41608 \begin_layout Standard
41609 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
41610 updated thesaurus dictionaries,
41611 you can download them from here:
41612 \begin_inset Newline newline
41616 \begin_inset Flex URL
41619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41621 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
41629 \begin_layout Standard
41630 To install a new dictionary,
41631 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
41633 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41634 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41635 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41637 \begin_inset space ~
41642 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
41644 If this path is not defined yet,
41645 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
41649 \begin_layout Standard
41651 you can also install new dictionaries via
41653 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
41658 via your package manager (look for
41664 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
41668 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
41669 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
41671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41677 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41678 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41679 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
41681 \begin_inset space ~
41686 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
41689 \begin_layout Subsection
41690 Using the thesaurus
41693 \begin_layout Standard
41694 To start the thesaurus,
41697 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41700 or the toolbar button
41703 arg "thesaurus-entry"
41706 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
41707 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
41708 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
41710 for some languages (such as English),
41711 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
41712 but also generic terms (such as
41721 related terms (such as
41724 \begin_inset space ~
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41747 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
41757 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
41760 \begin_layout Standard
41761 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
41762 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
41763 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
41766 \begin_layout Standard
41767 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
41773 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
41775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41779 \begin_inset space \space{}
41782 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
41783 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
41784 infinitive for verbs).
41786 looking up the word form
41791 while results are shown for the word form
41796 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
41797 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41801 \begin_inset space \space{}
41813 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
41814 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
41815 thus the ending remains).
41818 \begin_layout Section
41820 \begin_inset Index idx
41825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41832 \begin_inset Index idx
41837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41839 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41856 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
41863 \begin_layout Standard
41864 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
41865 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
41866 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
41868 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41870 \begin_inset space ~
41873 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
41875 \begin_inset space ~
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
41899 The color depends on the author that made the change.
41900 You can change the color in
41902 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41903 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41905 \begin_inset space ~
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41914 \SpecialChar menuseparator
41920 \begin_inset Index idx
41925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41927 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41941 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
41942 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
41943 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
41946 arg "changes-merge"
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41953 When change tracking is activated,
41954 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
41956 \begin_inset Index idx
41961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41963 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41980 \begin_layout Standard
41981 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41987 \begin_layout Standard
41988 \begin_inset Graphics
41989 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
41997 \begin_layout Standard
41998 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42004 \begin_layout Standard
42005 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
42008 \begin_layout Standard
42009 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42015 \begin_layout Standard
42016 \begin_inset Tabular
42017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
42018 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42019 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42020 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42030 arg "changes-track"
42038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42046 \begin_inset space ~
42049 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42051 \begin_inset space ~
42060 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42069 arg "changes-output"
42077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42085 \begin_inset space ~
42088 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42090 \begin_inset space ~
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42128 Jumps to the next change
42134 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42143 arg "change-accept"
42151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42157 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42159 \begin_inset space ~
42162 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42164 \begin_inset space ~
42173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42182 arg "change-reject"
42190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42196 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42198 \begin_inset space ~
42201 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42203 \begin_inset space ~
42212 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42221 arg "changes-merge"
42229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42237 \begin_inset space ~
42240 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42242 \begin_inset space ~
42251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42260 arg "all-changes-accept"
42268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42276 \begin_inset space ~
42279 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42281 \begin_inset space ~
42285 \begin_inset space ~
42294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42303 arg "all-changes-reject"
42311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42319 \begin_inset space ~
42322 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42328 \begin_inset space ~
42337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42360 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42361 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42372 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42395 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42397 \begin_inset space ~
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42414 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42420 \begin_layout Standard
42421 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
42422 especially no format changes like from
42441 \begin_layout Standard
42442 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
42444 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
42445 When you merge changes,
42446 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
42447 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
42448 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
42449 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
42452 \begin_layout Standard
42453 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
42456 \begin_layout Section
42457 Comparison of Documents
42458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42460 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42465 \begin_inset Index idx
42470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 Comparison of documents
42479 \begin_layout Standard
42480 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
42483 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42487 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
42488 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
42489 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
42490 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
42493 \begin_inset space ~
42497 \begin_inset space ~
42501 \begin_inset space ~
42510 \begin_inset space ~
42514 \begin_inset space ~
42518 \begin_inset space ~
42522 \begin_inset space ~
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42530 \begin_inset space ~
42535 enables the change tracking option
42538 \begin_inset space ~
42542 \begin_inset space ~
42546 \begin_inset space ~
42551 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
42554 \begin_layout Section
42555 International Support
42556 \begin_inset Index idx
42561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 International support
42570 \begin_layout Standard
42571 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
42572 with any language you want.
42573 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
42576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42578 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
42586 \begin_layout Standard
42589 also supports phonetic symbols,
42591 \begin_inset space ~
42595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42597 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
42605 \begin_layout Subsection
42607 \begin_inset Index idx
42612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42629 \begin_inset Index idx
42634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42636 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 \begin_inset Index idx
42656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42658 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42675 \begin_layout Standard
42678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42679 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42682 dialog lets you set
42685 the quote style and character encoding
42690 \begin_layout Standard
42695 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42705 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
42706 For details about the different encoding options see section
42707 \begin_inset space ~
42711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42713 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
42721 \begin_layout Subsection
42722 Keyboard mapping configuration
42723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42725 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 If you have for example a U.
42734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42737 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
42738 you can use an alternate keymap.
42740 if you want to write in Italian,
42741 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
42742 to use an Italian keymap.
42745 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42746 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42747 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
42750 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
42752 \begin_inset space ~
42756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42758 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
42764 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
42767 \begin_layout Standard
42769 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
42773 normally write in Italian on a U.
42774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42777 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
42779 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
42780 This and many other customizations are explained in the
42787 \begin_layout Chapter
42790 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42792 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
42799 \begin_layout Standard
42800 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
42801 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
42804 \begin_layout Section
42806 \begin_inset Index idx
42811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42813 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 \begin_layout Standard
42835 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
42838 \begin_layout Subsection
42842 \begin_layout Standard
42843 Creates a new document.
42846 \begin_layout Subsection
42850 \begin_layout Standard
42851 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
42852 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
42853 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
42855 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
42858 \begin_layout Subsection
42862 \begin_layout Standard
42866 \begin_layout Subsection
42870 \begin_layout Standard
42871 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
42872 Click there on a file to open it.
42875 \begin_layout Subsection
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42880 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
42884 \begin_layout Subsection
42888 \begin_layout Standard
42889 Closes the current document.
42892 \begin_layout Subsection
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42897 Closes all opened documents.
42900 \begin_layout Subsection
42904 \begin_layout Standard
42905 Saves the actual document.
42908 \begin_layout Subsection
42912 \begin_layout Standard
42913 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
42916 \begin_layout Subsection
42920 \begin_layout Standard
42921 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
42924 \begin_layout Subsection
42928 \begin_layout Standard
42929 Saves all opened documents.
42932 \begin_layout Subsection
42936 \begin_layout Standard
42937 Reloads the actual document from disk.
42940 \begin_layout Subsection
42944 \begin_layout Standard
42945 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
42946 It is described in the section
42948 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
42953 Additional Features
42958 \begin_layout Subsection
42962 \begin_layout Standard
42963 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
42969 plain text files and comma separated,
42970 table-like text files (CSV).
42971 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
42975 \begin_layout Standard
42976 When using the menu entry
42979 \begin_inset space ~
42985 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
42986 when using the menu entry
42989 \begin_inset space ~
42993 \begin_inset space ~
42997 \begin_inset space ~
43003 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
43004 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
43007 \begin_layout Subsection
43009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43011 name "subsec:Export"
43018 \begin_layout Standard
43019 You can export your document to various file formats.
43020 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
43022 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
43023 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
43024 during its configuration.
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43028 Here is a list of all available entries;
43029 some of them are explained in detail in section
43030 \begin_inset space ~
43034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43036 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43044 \begin_layout Description
43050 \begin_inset space ~
43053 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43058 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
43059 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
43060 \begin_inset Newline newline
43063 Since \SpecialChar LyX
43064 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
43068 \begin_layout Description
43069 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
43074 \begin_layout Description
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43079 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
43084 \begin_layout Description
43085 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
43086 's native DVI-format.
43087 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
43089 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
43096 \begin_layout Description
43097 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
43100 \begin_layout Description
43102 \begin_inset space ~
43109 ) DVI-format using the program
43111 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43115 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
43120 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43129 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
43137 \begin_layout Description
43139 \begin_inset space ~
43142 (cropped) the same as
43146 but with cropped page margins.
43149 \begin_layout Description
43151 \begin_inset space ~
43154 Dot text file with code in the programming language
43158 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
43163 \begin_layout Description
43168 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43177 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
43185 \begin_layout Description
43187 \begin_inset space ~
43191 \begin_inset space ~
43194 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
43199 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
43206 \begin_layout Description
43210 \begin_inset space ~
43219 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43220 source that is compilable with the program
43222 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43226 \begin_layout Description
43230 \begin_inset space ~
43235 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43237 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
43247 \begin_layout Description
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43256 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43258 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
43259 only this format is readable by the
43266 \begin_layout Description
43270 \begin_inset space ~
43279 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43280 source that is compilable with the program
43286 \begin_layout Description
43288 \begin_inset space ~
43292 \begin_inset space ~
43299 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43300 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
43305 \begin_layout Description
43307 \begin_inset space ~
43310 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
43311 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
43313 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43317 \begin_inset space \space{}
43322 \begin_inset space ~
43327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43342 represent the version number)
43345 \begin_layout Description
43347 \begin_inset space ~
43351 \begin_inset space ~
43354 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
43356 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43361 \begin_layout Description
43362 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
43363 's internal XHTML engine
43366 \begin_layout Description
43368 \begin_inset space ~
43372 \begin_inset space ~
43376 \begin_inset space ~
43380 \begin_inset space ~
43383 XML Office Open XML file,
43389 For the conversion the program
43398 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43401 \begin_layout Description
43402 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
43407 \begin_layout Description
43409 \begin_inset space ~
43412 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
43422 For the conversion the program
43431 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43434 \begin_layout Description
43436 \begin_inset space ~
43439 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
43440 For the conversion the program
43449 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
43452 \begin_layout Description
43454 \begin_inset space ~
43457 (cropped) the same as
43460 \begin_inset space ~
43465 but with cropped page margins
43468 \begin_layout Description
43472 \begin_inset space ~
43477 PDF-format using the program
43482 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43485 \begin_layout Description
43489 \begin_inset space ~
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43506 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
43507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43511 \begin_inset space \space{}
43514 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
43517 \begin_layout Description
43521 \begin_inset space ~
43526 PDF-format using the program
43528 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43532 produces PDF-files directly
43535 \begin_layout Description
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43544 PDF-format using the program
43549 produces PDF-files directly
43552 \begin_layout Description
43556 \begin_inset space ~
43561 PDF-format using the program
43566 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
43569 \begin_layout Description
43573 \begin_inset space ~
43578 PDF-format using the program
43584 produces PDF-files directly
43587 \begin_layout Description
43591 \begin_inset space ~
43599 \begin_layout Description
43603 \begin_inset space ~
43607 \begin_inset space ~
43613 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
43618 \begin_layout Description
43623 PostScript format using the program
43632 options see section
43633 \begin_inset space ~
43637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43639 reference "subsec:General-output"
43647 \begin_layout Description
43648 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43649 source and also code in the statistical programming language
43662 it is possible to use
43666 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
43670 \begin_layout Standard
43671 If one of the menu entries
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43689 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43691 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43694 \begin_inset space ~
43698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43700 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43706 \begin_inset Index idx
43711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43712 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43721 \begin_layout Subsection
43725 \begin_layout Standard
43726 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
43729 \begin_inset space ~
43733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43735 reference "sec:Paths"
43741 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
43750 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
43751 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
43752 's preferences as described in section
43753 \begin_inset space ~
43757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43759 reference "subsec:Converters"
43767 \begin_layout Subsection
43768 New and Close Window
43771 \begin_layout Standard
43772 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43776 \begin_layout Subsection
43780 \begin_layout Standard
43781 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
43784 \begin_layout Section
43786 \begin_inset Index idx
43791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43810 \begin_layout Subsection
43814 \begin_layout Standard
43815 Described in section
43816 \begin_inset space ~
43820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43822 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
43830 \begin_layout Subsection
43838 \begin_layout Standard
43839 Described in section
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43846 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43854 \begin_layout Subsection
43858 \begin_layout Standard
43859 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
43860 If the cursor is outside an inset,
43861 the whole document will be selected.
43864 \begin_layout Subsection
43868 \begin_layout Standard
43869 Selects the whole document.
43872 \begin_layout Subsection
43873 Find & Replace (Quick)
43876 \begin_layout Standard
43877 Described in section
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43884 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
43892 \begin_layout Subsection
43893 Find & Replace (Advanced)
43896 \begin_layout Standard
43897 Described in section
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43904 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
43912 \begin_layout Subsection
43913 Move Paragraph Up/Down
43916 \begin_layout Standard
43917 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
43920 \begin_layout Subsection
43922 \begin_inset Index idx
43927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43929 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43946 \begin_layout Standard
43947 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
43948 line spacing and label width.
43949 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
43952 \begin_layout Standard
43953 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
43959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43960 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43970 \begin_layout Subsection
43974 \begin_layout Standard
43975 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
43979 \begin_layout Enumerate
43980 Customize text properties by means of the
43986 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
43990 this is described in section
43991 \begin_inset space ~
43995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43997 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
44005 \begin_layout Enumerate
44006 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
44008 Apply last settings
44011 \begin_layout Enumerate
44012 Change the casing of selected text (
44029 \begin_layout Subsection
44033 \begin_layout Standard
44034 This sub-menu only appears if the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
44060 \begin_inset space ~
44064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44066 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
44074 \begin_layout Subsection
44075 Table and Rows & Columns
44078 \begin_layout Standard
44079 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
44080 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
44081 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
44084 \begin_layout Subsection
44088 \begin_layout Standard
44089 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
44090 It will dissolve this inset.
44091 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
44094 \begin_layout Subsection
44098 \begin_layout Standard
44099 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
44100 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
44103 \begin_layout Subsection
44104 Increase/Decrease List Depth
44107 \begin_layout Standard
44108 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
44109 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
44110 \begin_inset space ~
44114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44116 reference "sec:Nesting"
44122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44124 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44132 \begin_layout Section
44134 \begin_inset Index idx
44139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44141 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44158 \begin_layout Standard
44159 At the bottom of the
44163 menu the opened documents are listed.
44166 \begin_layout Subsection
44167 Open/Close all Insets
44170 \begin_layout Standard
44171 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
44174 \begin_layout Subsection
44175 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
44178 \begin_layout Standard
44179 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
44182 \begin_layout Standard
44183 Math macros are described in the
44190 \begin_layout Subsection
44194 \begin_layout Standard
44195 Shows the outline window as described in sections
44196 \begin_inset space ~
44200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44202 reference "sec:Navigating"
44208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44210 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
44218 \begin_layout Subsection
44222 \begin_layout Standard
44223 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
44224 as described in section
44225 \begin_inset space ~
44229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44231 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44239 \begin_layout Subsection
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44244 Opens a window showing console messages.
44245 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
44247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44251 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
44252 is processing the document.
44255 \begin_layout Subsection
44257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44259 name "subsec:Toolbars"
44264 \begin_inset Index idx
44269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44278 \begin_layout Standard
44279 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
44280 All toolbars and the
44283 \begin_inset space ~
44301 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
44304 \begin_layout Standard
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44327 \begin_inset space ~
44340 \begin_inset space ~
44345 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
44350 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
44367 \begin_layout Standard
44372 state the toolbar is permanently shown,
44377 state it is never shown;
44382 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
44383 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
44384 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively,
44385 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment.
44388 \begin_layout Standard
44390 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44397 reference "sec:Toolbars"
44405 \begin_layout Subsection
44409 \begin_layout Standard
44413 \begin_inset space ~
44417 \begin_inset space ~
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44425 \begin_inset space ~
44429 \begin_inset space ~
44433 \begin_inset space ~
44438 will split \SpecialChar LyX
44439 's main window vertically while
44442 \begin_inset space ~
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44450 \begin_inset space ~
44454 \begin_inset space ~
44458 \begin_inset space ~
44462 \begin_inset space ~
44467 will split it horizontally.
44468 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
44469 or to view the same document,
44470 but at different positions.
44471 You can even split the main window several times to view,
44473 three or more documents at the same time.
44474 To close a split view,
44478 \begin_inset space ~
44482 \begin_inset space ~
44490 \begin_layout Subsection
44494 \begin_layout Standard
44495 Closes a split view.
44498 \begin_layout Subsection
44502 \begin_layout Standard
44503 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
44504 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
44505 's main window fullscreen.
44506 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
44508 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
44511 \begin_layout Section
44513 \begin_inset Index idx
44518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44520 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 \begin_layout Subsection
44541 \begin_layout Standard
44542 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
44543 \begin_inset space ~
44547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44549 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
44561 \begin_layout Subsection
44563 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44565 name "subsec:Special-Character"
44572 \begin_layout Standard
44573 Here you can insert the following characters:
44576 \begin_layout Description
44581 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44583 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
44584 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44585 -packages you have installed.
44586 You can get a complete display by checking
44589 \begin_inset space ~
44595 \begin_inset Newline newline
44599 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44608 Not all characters will be visible in the
44612 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
44613 \begin_inset space ~
44617 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44619 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
44624 ) can display every character.
44632 \begin_layout Description
44633 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
44638 \begin_layout Description
44640 \begin_inset space ~
44644 \begin_inset space ~
44647 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
44648 \begin_inset space ~
44652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44654 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
44662 \begin_layout Description
44664 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109674
44666 \begin_inset space ~
44670 \begin_inset space ~
44674 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109675
44676 \begin_inset space ~
44682 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109680
44684 \begin_inset space ~
44688 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109681
44691 Inserts this quote:
44693 no matter what quote style you selected in the
44695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44696 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44702 \begin_layout Description
44704 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109701
44706 \begin_inset space ~
44710 \begin_inset space ~
44714 \begin_inset space ~
44717 Mark Inserts this quote:
44719 \begin_inset Quotes qls
44723 no matter what quote style you have selected.
44726 \begin_layout Description
44728 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109722
44730 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109720
44734 \begin_inset space ~
44738 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109726
44740 \begin_inset space ~
44744 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109727
44748 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109731
44752 \change_deleted -584632292 1712109733
44756 \change_inserted -584632292 1712109738
44757 (usually a single quote)
44759 in the quotation marks style selected in the
44761 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44762 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44768 \begin_layout Description
44770 \begin_inset space ~
44773 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that prevents automatic line breaks:
44774 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
44778 \begin_layout Description
44780 \begin_inset space ~
44783 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
44784 \SpecialChar breakableslash
44788 \begin_layout Description
44790 \begin_inset space ~
44793 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
44795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44799 \begin_inset space \space{}
44802 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
44803 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
44810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44813 To insert a fraction use the command
44818 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
44822 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
44828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44831 The visible space is hereby the character before the
44838 \begin_layout Description
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44843 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
44844 \SpecialChar menuseparator
44848 \begin_layout Description
44850 \begin_inset space ~
44854 \begin_inset Index idx
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44866 \begin_inset Index idx
44871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44873 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
44888 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44894 \begin_inset Index idx
44899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44917 \begin_inset Newline newline
44920 More information about this feature can be found in the
44926 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
44932 \begin_layout Description
44933 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
44938 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
44942 \begin_layout Subsection
44946 \begin_layout Standard
44947 Opens a submenu with the following options:
44950 \begin_layout Description
44951 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
44953 \begin_inset script superscript
44955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44965 \begin_layout Description
44966 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
44968 \begin_inset script subscript
44970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44979 \begin_layout Description
44981 \begin_inset space ~
44984 Space Inserts a non-breaking space as described in section
44985 \begin_inset space ~
44989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44991 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
44999 \begin_layout Description
45001 \begin_inset space ~
45004 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
45005 \begin_inset space ~
45009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45011 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
45019 \begin_layout Description
45021 \begin_inset space ~
45024 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45031 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
45039 \begin_layout Description
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45044 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
45045 \begin_inset space ~
45049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45051 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
45059 \begin_layout Description
45061 \begin_inset space ~
45064 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45071 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
45079 \begin_layout Description
45081 \begin_inset space ~
45084 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
45085 \begin_inset space ~
45089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45091 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
45099 \begin_layout Description
45100 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45107 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
45115 \begin_layout Description
45117 \begin_inset space ~
45120 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
45121 \begin_inset space ~
45125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45127 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
45135 \begin_layout Description
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45140 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
45141 \begin_inset space ~
45145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45147 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
45155 \begin_layout Description
45157 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45164 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
45166 \begin_inset space ~
45170 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45172 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
45180 for a usage example.
45183 \begin_layout Description
45185 \begin_inset space ~
45189 \begin_inset space ~
45192 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
45193 \begin_inset space ~
45197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45199 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45207 \begin_layout Description
45209 \begin_inset space ~
45212 Break Inserts a forced line break that justifies the remaining text as described in section
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45219 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
45227 \begin_layout Description
45229 \begin_inset space ~
45232 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
45233 \begin_inset space ~
45237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45239 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45247 \begin_layout Description
45249 \begin_inset space ~
45252 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
45253 as described in section
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45260 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
45268 \begin_layout Description
45270 \begin_inset space ~
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45277 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
45278 to prevent a page break at the given position.
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45290 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
45298 \begin_layout Description
45300 \begin_inset space ~
45303 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45310 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45318 \begin_layout Description
45320 \begin_inset space ~
45324 \begin_inset space ~
45327 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
45328 \begin_inset space ~
45332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45334 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
45342 \begin_layout Subsection
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45347 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
45348 The submenu allows you to insert
45351 \begin_layout Description
45353 \begin_inset space ~
45356 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
45359 \begin_layout Description
45361 \begin_inset space ~
45365 \begin_inset space ~
45368 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
45371 \begin_layout Description
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45376 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
45379 \begin_layout Description
45381 \begin_inset space ~
45384 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
45387 \begin_layout Description
45389 \begin_inset space ~
45393 \begin_inset space ~
45396 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
45399 \begin_layout Description
45401 \begin_inset space ~
45404 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
45407 \begin_layout Description
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45417 \begin_inset space ~
45420 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
45423 \begin_layout Description
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset space ~
45432 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
45434 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
45437 \begin_layout Description
45439 \begin_inset space ~
45442 Name inserts the user name as specified in
45444 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45445 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45451 \begin_layout Description
45453 \begin_inset space ~
45456 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
45458 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45459 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45465 \begin_layout Description
45466 Other\SpecialChar ldots
45467 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
45470 \begin_layout Subsection
45473 List/Contents/References
45476 \begin_layout Standard
45477 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
45481 \begin_inset space ~
45505 are described in section
45506 \begin_inset space ~
45510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45512 reference "sec:toc"
45522 is described in section
45523 \begin_inset space ~
45527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45529 reference "sec:Index"
45539 is described in section
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45546 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45553 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
45556 is described in section
45557 \begin_inset space ~
45561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45563 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45571 \begin_layout Subsection
45575 \begin_layout Standard
45577 as described in section
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45584 reference "sec:Floats"
45589 and in detail the chapter
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45604 \begin_layout Subsection
45608 \begin_layout Standard
45610 described in section
45611 \begin_inset space ~
45615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45617 reference "sec:Notes"
45625 \begin_layout Subsection
45629 \begin_layout Standard
45630 Inserts a branch inset,
45632 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
45633 Branches are described in section
45634 \begin_inset space ~
45638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45640 reference "sec:Branches"
45648 \begin_layout Subsection
45652 \begin_layout Standard
45653 Inserts document class-specific insets.
45654 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
45655 An example is the document class
45659 with three custom insets.
45662 Flex insets and InsetLayout
45666 Installing New Document Classes,
45667 The Layout file format
45673 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
45676 \begin_layout Subsection
45678 \begin_inset Index idx
45683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45692 \begin_layout Standard
45693 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
45694 For more information see chapter
45696 External Document Parts
45699 \begin_inset space ~
45705 \begin_layout Subsection
45707 \begin_inset Index idx
45712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45721 \begin_layout Standard
45722 Inserts a box in a certain style.
45723 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
45730 \begin_inset space ~
45738 \begin_layout Subsection
45742 \begin_layout Standard
45747 dialog as described in section
45748 \begin_inset space ~
45752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45754 reference "sec:Bibliography"
45762 \begin_layout Subsection
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45771 as described in section
45772 \begin_inset space ~
45776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45778 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45786 \begin_layout Subsection
45790 \begin_layout Standard
45795 as described in section
45796 \begin_inset space ~
45800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45802 reference "sec:Cross-References"
45810 \begin_layout Subsection
45812 \begin_inset Index idx
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45824 \begin_inset Index idx
45829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45858 \begin_layout Standard
45859 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
45860 Floats are described in section
45861 \begin_inset space ~
45865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45867 reference "sec:Floats"
45873 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
45875 Multi-page Table Captions
45880 \begin_inset space ~
45888 \begin_layout Subsection
45892 \begin_layout Standard
45893 Inserts an index entry as described in section
45894 \begin_inset space ~
45898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45900 reference "sec:Index"
45908 \begin_layout Subsection
45912 \begin_layout Standard
45913 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
45914 \begin_inset space ~
45918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45920 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
45928 \begin_layout Subsection
45932 \begin_layout Standard
45933 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
45934 Tables are described in section
45935 \begin_inset space ~
45939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45941 reference "sec:Tables"
45946 and in detail in the chapter
45953 \begin_inset space ~
45961 \begin_layout Subsection
45965 \begin_layout Standard
45971 Graphics are described in section
45972 \begin_inset space ~
45976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45978 reference "sec:Graphics"
45986 \begin_layout Subsection
45990 \begin_layout Standard
45991 Inserts a URL as described in section
45992 \begin_inset space ~
45996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45998 reference "subsec:URLs"
46006 \begin_layout Subsection
46010 \begin_layout Standard
46011 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
46012 \begin_inset space ~
46016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46018 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
46026 \begin_layout Subsection
46030 \begin_layout Standard
46031 Inserts a footnote as described in section
46032 \begin_inset space ~
46036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46038 reference "sec:Footnotes"
46046 \begin_layout Subsection
46050 \begin_layout Standard
46051 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
46052 \begin_inset space ~
46056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46058 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
46066 \begin_layout Subsection
46069 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
46075 \begin_inset space ~
46079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46081 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
46086 for an explanation.
46089 \begin_layout Subsection
46093 \begin_layout Standard
46094 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
46095 in or behind a section heading,
46096 title or caption of a float.
46097 Inserts a short title as described in section
46098 \begin_inset space ~
46102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46104 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
46112 \begin_layout Subsection
46117 \begin_layout Standard
46118 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
46119 Code box as described in section
46120 \begin_inset space ~
46124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46126 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
46134 \begin_layout Subsection
46136 \begin_inset Index idx
46141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46150 \begin_layout Standard
46151 Inserts a program listings box.
46152 Program listings are explained in the chapter
46154 Program Code Listings
46159 \begin_inset space ~
46167 \begin_layout Subsection
46171 \begin_layout Standard
46172 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
46173 \begin_inset space ~
46177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46179 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46187 \begin_layout Section
46189 \begin_inset Index idx
46194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46196 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 This menu lists the existing chapters,
46219 \begin_inset space ~
46222 of the current document.
46223 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
46226 \begin_layout Subsection
46230 \begin_layout Standard
46231 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
46232 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
46235 \begin_inset space ~
46239 To create bookmarks for this example,
46241 \begin_inset space ~
46244 2.5 and use the submenu
46247 \begin_inset space ~
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46258 \begin_inset space ~
46264 \begin_inset space ~
46268 \begin_inset space ~
46274 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
46277 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
46283 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
46286 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
46289 \begin_layout Standard
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46298 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
46301 \begin_inset space ~
46306 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
46309 \begin_layout Subsection
46315 \begin_layout Standard
46316 Jump to the next note,
46318 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
46321 \begin_layout Subsection
46325 \begin_layout Standard
46326 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
46327 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
46328 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
46331 \begin_inset space ~
46335 \begin_inset space ~
46343 \begin_layout Subsection
46347 \begin_layout Standard
46348 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
46351 The \SpecialChar LyX
46352 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
46354 \begin_inset space ~
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46367 manual for a detailed description.
46370 \begin_layout Section
46372 \begin_inset Index idx
46377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46396 \begin_layout Subsection
46400 \begin_layout Standard
46401 Change Tracking is described in section
46402 \begin_inset space ~
46406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46408 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46416 \begin_layout Subsection
46424 \begin_layout Standard
46425 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
46426 by viewing or exporting a document,
46427 this menu will be enabled.
46428 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46430 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
46432 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
46433 \begin_inset Newline newline
46436 With the help of the logfile,
46437 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46441 \begin_layout Standard
46444 Open Containing Directory
46446 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
46447 's temporary folder for the document.
46448 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
46449 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
46450 For example some journals require to send the
46454 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46458 \begin_layout Subsection
46459 Start Appendix Here
46462 \begin_layout Standard
46463 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
46464 \begin_inset space ~
46468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46470 reference "sec:Appendices"
46478 \begin_layout Subsection
46480 \begin_inset space ~
46486 \begin_layout Standard
46487 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
46489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46490 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46491 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46493 \begin_inset space ~
46497 \begin_inset space ~
46504 \begin_inset space ~
46508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46510 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46515 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
46518 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46519 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46524 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46526 \begin_inset space ~
46529 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46531 \begin_inset space ~
46535 \begin_inset space ~
46542 \begin_inset space ~
46546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46548 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46553 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
46554 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46556 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46557 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46559 \begin_inset space ~
46562 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46564 \begin_inset space ~
46567 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46572 \begin_inset space ~
46576 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46578 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46584 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46585 when it is first configured.
46586 The default output format is
46589 \begin_inset space ~
46597 \begin_layout Subsection
46598 View (Other Formats)
46601 \begin_layout Standard
46602 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
46603 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
46604 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
46605 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46606 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
46608 All possible formats are listed in section
46609 \begin_inset space ~
46613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46615 reference "subsec:Export"
46621 You should at least see the menu entry
46627 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46629 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
46631 \begin_inset space ~
46635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46637 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
46643 \begin_inset Index idx
46648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46649 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
46658 \begin_layout Standard
46659 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
46660 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
46662 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46663 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46665 \begin_inset space ~
46668 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46670 \begin_inset space ~
46673 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46678 \begin_inset space ~
46682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46684 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46690 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
46691 when it is first configured.
46694 \begin_layout Subsection
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46702 \begin_layout Standard
46703 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
46706 \begin_layout Subsection
46707 Update (Other Formats)
46710 \begin_layout Standard
46711 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
46714 \begin_layout Subsection
46715 View Master Document
46718 \begin_layout Standard
46719 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46735 \begin_inset space ~
46740 manual for more information on this topic).
46741 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
46743 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
46747 \begin_inset space ~
46751 \begin_inset space ~
46756 generates the output of the whole book,
46761 will just output the chapter alone.
46764 \begin_layout Standard
46765 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46768 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46769 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46775 \begin_inset space ~
46782 \begin_inset space ~
46786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46788 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46793 ) or in the preferences (menu
46795 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46796 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46798 \begin_inset space ~
46801 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46803 \begin_inset space ~
46806 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46808 \begin_inset space ~
46812 \begin_inset space ~
46819 \begin_inset space ~
46823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46825 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46833 \begin_layout Subsection
46834 Update Master Document
46837 \begin_layout Standard
46838 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
46840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46859 manual for more information on this topic).
46860 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
46863 \begin_layout Standard
46864 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
46866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46867 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46868 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46870 \begin_inset space ~
46874 \begin_inset space ~
46881 \begin_inset space ~
46885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46887 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
46892 ) or in the preferences (menu
46894 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46895 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46897 \begin_inset space ~
46900 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46902 \begin_inset space ~
46905 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46911 \begin_inset space ~
46918 \begin_inset space ~
46922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46924 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46932 \begin_layout Subsection
46934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46936 name "subsec:Compressed"
46943 \begin_layout Standard
46944 Un/compresses the current document.
46945 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
46947 Additional Features
46949 manual for details).
46952 \begin_layout Subsection
46956 \begin_layout Standard
46957 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
46960 \begin_layout Subsection
46964 \begin_layout Standard
46965 The document settings are described in appendix
46966 \begin_inset space ~
46970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46972 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46980 \begin_layout Section
46982 \begin_inset Index idx
46987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46989 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47006 \begin_layout Subsection
47010 \begin_layout Standard
47011 Spell checking is explained in section
47012 \begin_inset space ~
47016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47018 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47026 \begin_layout Subsection
47030 \begin_layout Standard
47031 The thesaurus is described in section
47032 \begin_inset space ~
47036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47038 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
47046 \begin_layout Subsection
47048 \begin_inset Index idx
47053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47060 \begin_inset Index idx
47065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47074 \begin_layout Standard
47075 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
47078 \begin_layout Subsection
47084 \begin_inset Index idx
47089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47090 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
47099 \begin_layout Standard
47100 Generates with the help of the program
47102 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
47105 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
47106 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
47107 This feature is not available on Windows.
47110 \begin_layout Subsection
47116 \begin_inset Index idx
47121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47131 \begin_layout Standard
47132 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47137 \begin_inset space ~
47142 to see the full filename paths.
47145 \begin_layout Subsection
47147 \begin_inset Index idx
47152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47161 \begin_layout Standard
47162 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
47163 files as described in section
47164 \begin_inset space ~
47168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47170 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
47178 \begin_layout Subsection
47180 \begin_inset Index idx
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47188 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47198 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
47201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47202 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47214 \begin_inset Index idx
47219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47220 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47229 \begin_layout Standard
47230 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
47234 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47235 -packages and programs it needs;
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47243 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47251 \begin_layout Subsection
47255 \begin_layout Standard
47260 dialog as described in detail in appendix
47261 \begin_inset space ~
47265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47267 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47275 \begin_layout Section
47277 \begin_inset Index idx
47282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47284 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47301 \begin_layout Standard
47302 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
47303 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
47305 If a file is not available in this language,
47306 the English version will be listed.
47309 \begin_layout Standard
47313 \begin_inset space ~
47318 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
47319 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47320 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
47322 \begin_inset space ~
47326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47328 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
47336 \begin_layout Standard
47340 \begin_inset space ~
47345 gives information about the copyright,
47346 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
47347 version you are using.
47350 \begin_layout Section
47352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47354 name "sec:Toolbars"
47361 \begin_layout Standard
47362 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
47363 \begin_inset space ~
47367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47369 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
47377 \begin_layout Standard
47378 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
47379 This is described in the
47381 Additional Features
47386 \begin_layout Subsection
47388 \begin_inset Index idx
47393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47395 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47412 \begin_layout Standard
47413 \begin_inset Graphics
47414 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
47422 \begin_layout Standard
47423 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47429 \begin_layout Standard
47430 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
47434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47446 \begin_inset Note Note
47449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47450 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
47455 manual for more information.
47463 \begin_layout Standard
47464 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47470 \begin_layout Standard
47471 \begin_inset Tabular
47472 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
47473 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47474 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47475 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
47477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47481 \begin_inset Graphics
47482 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
47492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47496 pull-down box for the environments
47509 \begin_layout Standard
47510 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
47516 \begin_layout Standard
47518 \begin_inset Tabular
47519 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
47520 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47521 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47522 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47523 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47546 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47553 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47576 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47606 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47622 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
47630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47636 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47652 arg "spelling-continuously"
47660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47664 Spellcheck continuously
47670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47693 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47700 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47723 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47753 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47760 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47783 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47790 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47813 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47818 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47825 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47834 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
47842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47848 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47874 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
47882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47888 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
47890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47916 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
47924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47930 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47931 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
47938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47963 arg "dialog-show character"
47972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47993 Set text to noun style,
47997 arg "dialog-show character"
48006 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48013 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
48021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48027 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48054 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48078 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
48080 \begin_inset space ~
48089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48098 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
48106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48126 arg "tabular-insert"
48134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48147 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48154 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
48162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48175 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48184 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
48192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48196 Toggle outline window on/off,
48199 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
48206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48215 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
48223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48227 Toggle math toolbar on/off
48233 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48242 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
48250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48254 Toggle table toolbar on/off
48267 \begin_layout Subsection
48269 \begin_inset Index idx
48274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48276 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48293 \begin_layout Standard
48294 \begin_inset Graphics
48295 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
48303 \begin_layout Standard
48304 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48310 \begin_layout Standard
48311 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
48314 \begin_layout Standard
48315 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
48321 \begin_layout Standard
48322 \begin_inset Tabular
48323 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
48324 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
48325 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48326 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
48327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48363 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
48371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48390 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
48398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48408 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48417 arg "layout-toggle List"
48425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48444 arg "layout-toggle Description"
48452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48471 arg "depth-increment"
48479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48487 \begin_inset space ~
48491 \begin_inset space ~
48500 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48509 arg "depth-decrement"
48517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48523 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
48525 \begin_inset space ~
48529 \begin_inset space ~
48538 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48547 arg "float-insert figure"
48555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48562 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48578 arg "float-insert table"
48586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48593 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
48600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48630 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48639 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
48647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48653 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48660 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48669 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
48677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48690 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48715 \begin_inset space ~
48724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48733 arg "nomencl-insert"
48741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48747 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48749 \begin_inset space ~
48758 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48767 arg "footnote-insert"
48775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48797 arg "marginalnote-insert"
48805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48811 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48813 \begin_inset space ~
48822 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48846 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
48848 \begin_inset space ~
48857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48866 arg "box-insert Frameless"
48874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48887 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48910 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48942 \begin_inset space ~
48951 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48960 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
48968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48974 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
48975 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
48982 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
48983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
48986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
48999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
49006 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49008 \begin_inset space ~
49017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 arg "dialog-show character"
49034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49040 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49042 \begin_inset space ~
49045 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
49052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49061 arg "textstyle-apply"
49069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49073 Format text using the recent settings in the
49076 arg "dialog-show character"
49085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49094 arg "layout-paragraph"
49102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49108 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
49110 \begin_inset space ~
49119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49128 arg "thesaurus-entry"
49136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49142 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49156 \begin_layout Subsection
49157 View/Update Toolbar
49158 \begin_inset Index idx
49163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49165 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49182 \begin_layout Standard
49183 \begin_inset Graphics
49184 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
49191 \begin_layout Standard
49192 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49198 \begin_layout Standard
49199 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
49202 \begin_layout Standard
49203 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
49209 \begin_layout Standard
49210 \begin_inset Tabular
49211 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
49212 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
49213 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49214 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
49215 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49238 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49254 arg "buffer-update"
49262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49275 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49284 arg "master-buffer-view"
49292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49298 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49300 \begin_inset space ~
49304 \begin_inset space ~
49313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49322 arg "master-buffer-update"
49330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49338 \begin_inset space ~
49342 \begin_inset space ~
49351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49360 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
49368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49376 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
49377 Synchronize with Output
49383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49404 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49405 View (Other Formats)
49411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
49412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49418 arg "update-others"
49426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
49429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49433 Update (Other Formats)
49446 \begin_layout Subsection
49450 \begin_layout Standard
49451 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
49452 \begin_inset space ~
49456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49458 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49465 \begin_inset Index idx
49470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49472 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49489 \begin_inset space ~
49494 manual and the math macro toolbar
49495 \begin_inset Index idx
49500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49502 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49523 \begin_layout Chapter
49524 The Document Settings
49525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49527 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
49532 \begin_inset Index idx
49537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49539 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49556 \begin_layout Standard
49560 \begin_inset space ~
49565 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
49567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49571 You can save your document settings as default with the
49573 Save as Document Defaults
49575 button in any dialog.
49576 This will create a template named
49580 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
49581 when you create a new document without using a template.
49584 \begin_layout Standard
49589 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
49590 This affects mostly class options,
49591 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
49594 \begin_layout Standard
49595 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
49596 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
49597 To find a setting quicker,
49598 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
49600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49604 \begin_inset space \space{}
49608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49616 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
49617 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
49618 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
49621 \begin_layout Section
49625 \begin_layout Standard
49626 Here you set the document class,
49629 and a master document.
49630 Document classes are described in section
49631 \begin_inset space ~
49635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49637 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
49645 \begin_layout Standard
49649 \begin_inset space ~
49654 you can load you own layout-file,
49655 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
49660 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
49661 as a layout for a document class.
49662 For more about layout-files,
49665 Installing New Document Classes,
49666 Types of Layout Files
49675 \begin_layout Standard
49676 Some classes use special class options by default.
49677 If this is the case,
49678 they are listed in the field
49682 and you can decide to use them or not.
49683 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
49684 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
49689 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49691 color and page layout packages.
49697 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49699 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
49703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49704 When you want to use one of the following drivers
49705 \begin_inset Newline newline
49719 \begin_inset Newline newline
49722 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
49729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49731 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
49744 \begin_layout Standard
49749 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
49750 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
49751 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
49752 This way child documents are always compilable.
49753 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
49760 \begin_inset space ~
49768 \begin_layout Standard
49769 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49779 \begin_inset Index idx
49784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49802 \begin_inset Index idx
49807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49810 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49824 for cross-references,
49826 \begin_inset space ~
49830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49832 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49840 \begin_layout Section
49844 \begin_layout Standard
49845 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
49846 Please refer to the section
49849 \begin_inset space ~
49857 \begin_inset space ~
49862 manual for details.
49865 \begin_layout Section
49869 \begin_layout Standard
49870 Modules are explained in section
49871 \begin_inset space ~
49875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49877 reference "subsec:Modules"
49885 \begin_layout Section
49889 \begin_layout Standard
49891 \begin_inset space ~
49895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49897 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
49905 \begin_layout Section
49909 \begin_layout Standard
49910 The document font settings are described in section
49911 \begin_inset space ~
49915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49917 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
49925 \begin_layout Section
49929 \begin_layout Standard
49930 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
49942 \begin_inset space ~
49947 and whether it should be a
49950 \begin_inset space ~
49955 can also be specified here.
49958 \begin_layout Standard
49959 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
49960 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
49961 That would be impractical,
49963 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
49965 it will be as you specified in the output.
49968 \begin_layout Standard
49971 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
49974 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
49975 justifies the text on screen.
49976 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
49980 \begin_layout Standard
49989 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
49992 \begin_layout Section
49996 \begin_layout Standard
49997 This dialog is described in sections
49998 \begin_inset space ~
50002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50004 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
50010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50012 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
50020 \begin_layout Section
50024 \begin_layout Standard
50025 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
50026 \begin_inset space ~
50030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50032 reference "subsec:Margins"
50040 \begin_layout Section
50042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50044 name "sec:Language-encodings"
50049 \begin_inset Index idx
50054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50056 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50073 \begin_layout Standard
50074 The document language and quote styles are set here.
50075 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50076 (the \SpecialChar LyX
50077 file is always encoded in utf8).
50078 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
50079 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
50080 -command is not known for a particular character).
50083 \begin_layout Standard
50086 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
50087 files in Unicode – or utf8,
50088 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
50089 's default encoding).
50090 This should normally fit your needs,
50091 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
50092 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
50093 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
50094 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
50096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50104 encodings is necessary.
50107 \begin_layout Standard
50109 provides support for these traditional encodings.
50112 Traditional (auto-selected)
50120 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).If the document contains text in more than one language you thus may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50125 \begin_layout Standard
50127 you can also select
50132 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
50133 Note that this encoding is then used for
50138 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
50141 \begin_layout Standard
50146 selection in the next dropdown menu does what it states:
50147 it prevents \SpecialChar LyX
50148 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50154 \begin_inset Index idx
50159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50162 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50177 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
50179 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
50181 Note that this option is only available for the standard
50187 Traditional (auto-selected)
50192 \begin_layout Standard
50196 \begin_inset space ~
50201 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50202 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
50203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50211 The possible settings are:
50214 \begin_layout Description
50215 Default uses the language package that is selected in
50217 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50218 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50222 \begin_inset space ~
50226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50228 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50236 \begin_layout Description
50237 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
50238 In many cases this will be
50243 \begin_inset Index idx
50248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50251 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50266 If the newer package
50271 \begin_inset Index idx
50276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50279 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50293 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50294 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50295 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
50297 this package will be used instead of
50304 \begin_layout Description
50306 \begin_inset space ~
50317 would be more appropriate.
50320 \begin_layout Description
50321 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
50322 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
50326 (for German texts),
50330 \begin_inset Newline newline
50335 usepackage{ngerman}
50338 \begin_layout Description
50339 None will not use a language package.
50340 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
50343 \begin_layout Standard
50344 Here is a list with the important encodings:
50347 \begin_layout Description
50348 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
50349 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
50351 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
50353 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
50354 -commands are needed.
50357 \begin_layout Description
50359 \begin_inset space ~
50363 \begin_inset space ~
50366 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
50369 \begin_layout Description
50371 \begin_inset space ~
50375 \begin_inset space ~
50378 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
50381 \begin_layout Description
50383 \begin_inset space ~
50386 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
50389 \begin_layout Description
50391 \begin_inset space ~
50395 \begin_inset space ~
50398 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
50399 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50400 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50403 \begin_layout Description
50405 \begin_inset space ~
50409 \begin_inset space ~
50412 8859-13) for Estonian,
50413 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50414 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
50417 \begin_layout Description
50419 \begin_inset space ~
50423 \begin_inset space ~
50426 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
50427 Latvian and Lithuanian,
50428 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
50431 \begin_layout Description
50433 \begin_inset space ~
50437 \begin_inset space ~
50441 \begin_inset space ~
50444 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
50445 \begin_inset space ~
50451 \begin_layout Description
50453 \begin_inset space ~
50457 \begin_inset space ~
50461 \begin_inset space ~
50464 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
50471 Slovak and Slovenian
50474 \begin_layout Description
50476 \begin_inset space ~
50480 \begin_inset space ~
50483 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
50484 used especially on UNIX OSes,
50485 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50486 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50487 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50488 \begin_inset space ~
50492 \begin_inset space ~
50498 \begin_layout Description
50500 \begin_inset space ~
50504 \begin_inset space ~
50507 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
50508 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
50509 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
50510 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50511 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
50512 \begin_inset space ~
50516 \begin_inset space ~
50522 \begin_layout Description
50524 \begin_inset space ~
50528 \begin_inset space ~
50531 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
50534 \begin_layout Description
50536 \begin_inset space ~
50540 \begin_inset space ~
50543 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
50546 \begin_layout Description
50548 \begin_inset space ~
50552 \begin_inset space ~
50555 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
50558 Serbian and Ukrainian
50561 \begin_layout Description
50563 \begin_inset space ~
50566 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
50569 \begin_layout Description
50571 \begin_inset space ~
50574 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
50577 \begin_layout Description
50579 \begin_inset space ~
50583 \begin_inset space ~
50586 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
50589 \begin_layout Description
50591 \begin_inset space ~
50595 \begin_inset space ~
50601 \begin_layout Description
50603 \begin_inset space ~
50607 \begin_inset space ~
50610 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
50611 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
50614 \begin_layout Description
50616 \begin_inset space ~
50620 \begin_inset space ~
50626 \begin_layout Description
50628 \begin_inset space ~
50632 \begin_inset space ~
50635 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50636 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50642 \begin_inset Index idx
50647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50650 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50666 set the document language to
50671 \begin_layout Description
50673 \begin_inset space ~
50677 \begin_inset space ~
50680 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50681 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50688 set the document language to
50691 \begin_inset space ~
50697 \begin_layout Description
50699 \begin_inset space ~
50703 \begin_inset space ~
50706 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
50707 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50713 \begin_inset Index idx
50718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50721 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50737 set the document language to
50742 \begin_layout Description
50744 \begin_inset space ~
50748 \begin_inset space ~
50751 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
50752 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50759 set the document language to
50764 \begin_layout Description
50766 \begin_inset space ~
50770 \begin_inset space ~
50773 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
50774 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50781 set the document language to
50786 \begin_layout Description
50788 \begin_inset space ~
50791 (EUC-KR) for Korean
50794 \begin_layout Description
50796 \begin_inset space ~
50800 \begin_inset space ~
50804 \begin_inset space ~
50807 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
50809 Maltese and Turkish
50812 \begin_layout Description
50814 \begin_inset space ~
50818 \begin_inset space ~
50822 \begin_inset space ~
50825 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
50834 Romanian and Slovenian,
50835 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
50838 \begin_layout Description
50840 \begin_inset space ~
50844 \begin_inset space ~
50850 \begin_layout Description
50852 \begin_inset space ~
50856 \begin_inset space ~
50859 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
50860 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
50863 \begin_layout Description
50865 \begin_inset space ~
50869 \begin_inset space ~
50872 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50878 \begin_inset Index idx
50883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50886 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50900 (for the languages Chinese,
50901 Japanese and Korean).
50902 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
50903 with the default encoding (
50905 Unicode (utf8) [default]
50911 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
50912 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50915 \begin_layout Description
50917 \begin_inset space ~
50925 \begin_inset space ~
50928 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
50935 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50939 which use Unicode directly,
50940 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50947 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50948 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50950 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
50953 \begin_layout Description
50955 \begin_inset space ~
50959 \begin_inset space ~
50962 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50968 \begin_inset Index idx
50973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50976 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50992 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
50993 This used to be more comprehensive than
50996 \begin_inset space ~
51002 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
51005 \begin_layout Description
51007 \begin_inset space ~
51010 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51016 \begin_inset Index idx
51021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51039 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
51040 with the default encoding (
51042 Unicode (utf8) [default]
51048 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
51049 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
51052 \begin_layout Description
51054 \begin_inset space ~
51058 \begin_inset space ~
51062 \begin_inset space ~
51065 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
51066 \begin_inset space ~
51072 \begin_layout Description
51074 \begin_inset space ~
51078 \begin_inset space ~
51082 \begin_inset space ~
51085 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
51100 Spanish and Swedish;
51101 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
51104 \begin_layout Description
51106 \begin_inset space ~
51110 \begin_inset space ~
51114 \begin_inset space ~
51117 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
51118 but with the Euro currency sign,
51119 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
51122 \begin_layout Section
51124 \begin_inset Index idx
51129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51131 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51146 \begin_inset Index idx
51151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51153 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51168 \begin_inset Index idx
51173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51175 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51190 \begin_inset Index idx
51195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51197 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51214 \begin_layout Standard
51215 Here you can alter the font color for the
51224 \begin_inset space ~
51230 light grey)for the background color for the
51238 \begin_inset space ~
51249 sets the color back to the default.
51252 \begin_layout Standard
51253 Clicking any button showing
51261 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
51262 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
51265 \begin_layout Standard
51270 \begin_inset space ~
51275 font color and use the option
51278 \begin_inset space ~
51283 in the document settings under
51286 \begin_inset space ~
51292 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
51293 \begin_inset space ~
51297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51299 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51307 \begin_layout Standard
51308 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
51314 \begin_layout Standard
51318 \begin_inset space ~
51327 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
51329 \begin_inset space ~
51332 Code after a forced page break:
51335 \begin_layout Itemize
51336 For the page color:
51337 \begin_inset Newline newline
51344 pagecolor{color name}
51347 \begin_layout Itemize
51348 For the text color:
51349 \begin_inset Newline newline
51359 \begin_layout Standard
51360 You are restricted to one of
51402 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
51409 \begin_inset space ~
51415 \begin_inset Newline newline
51418 If you have changed a text or background color,
51419 you can use the following names to refer to them:
51422 \begin_layout Itemize
51428 \begin_inset Newline newline
51433 page_backgroundcolor
51436 \begin_layout Itemize
51440 \begin_inset space ~
51446 \begin_inset Newline newline
51454 \begin_layout Itemize
51458 \begin_inset space ~
51464 \begin_inset Newline newline
51472 \begin_layout Itemize
51476 \begin_inset space ~
51482 \begin_inset Newline newline
51490 \begin_layout Standard
51491 To see how to define and use custom colors,
51495 \begin_inset space ~
51503 \begin_inset space ~
51511 \begin_layout Section
51515 \begin_layout Standard
51516 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
51517 \begin_inset space ~
51521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51523 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51532 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
51533 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
51536 \begin_layout Standard
51538 you can advise \SpecialChar LyX
51539 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
51540 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
51543 \begin_layout Section
51547 \begin_layout Standard
51548 Here you can adjust the
51552 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
51556 as described in section
51557 \begin_inset space ~
51561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51563 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
51571 \begin_layout Standard
51572 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
51573 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
51574 The most common one are:
51577 \begin_layout Description
51578 right Line numbers to the right margin
51581 \begin_layout Description
51582 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
51586 \begin_layout Description
51587 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
51590 \begin_layout Description
51591 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
51594 \begin_layout Description
51595 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
51598 \begin_layout Description
51600 \begin_inset space ~
51603 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
51606 \begin_layout Section
51610 \begin_layout Standard
51611 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51617 \begin_inset Index idx
51622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51625 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51645 \begin_inset Index idx
51650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51653 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51672 \begin_inset Index idx
51677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51680 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51695 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51699 Sectioned bibliography
51701 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51707 \begin_inset Index idx
51712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51715 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51735 you can select the style files and specify further options.
51737 you can select a document-specific
51741 for the generation of the bibliography.
51742 For a further description of these possibilities see section
51743 \begin_inset space ~
51747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51749 reference "sec:Bibliography"
51757 \begin_layout Section
51761 \begin_layout Standard
51762 Here you can define the
51766 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
51767 \begin_inset space ~
51771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51773 reference "sec:Index"
51781 \begin_layout Section
51785 \begin_layout Standard
51786 The PDF properties are explained in section
51787 \begin_inset space ~
51791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51793 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
51801 \begin_layout Section
51805 \begin_layout Standard
51806 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
51807 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51813 \begin_inset Index idx
51818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51821 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51841 \begin_inset Index idx
51846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51869 \begin_inset Index idx
51874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51877 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51897 \begin_inset Index idx
51902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51905 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51925 \begin_inset Index idx
51930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51933 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51953 \begin_inset Index idx
51958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51961 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51981 \begin_inset Index idx
51986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51989 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52009 \begin_inset Index idx
52014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52017 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52037 \begin_inset Index idx
52042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52045 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52064 \begin_inset Index idx
52069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52072 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52087 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
52090 \begin_layout Description
52091 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
52092 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
52093 -errors in formulas,
52094 ensure that you have this enabled.
52097 \begin_layout Description
52098 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
52099 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
52100 -errors in formulas,
52101 ensure that you have this enabled.
52104 \begin_layout Description
52105 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
52109 \begin_inset space ~
52121 \begin_layout Description
52122 esint is used for special integral characters,
52126 \begin_inset space ~
52138 \begin_layout Description
52139 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
52151 \begin_layout Description
52152 mathtools is used for the math commands
52193 and labeled arrows,
52194 see the corresponding sections in the
52201 \begin_layout Description
52202 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
52205 Chemical Symbols and Equations
52214 \begin_layout Description
52215 stackrel is used for the math command
52233 \begin_layout Description
52234 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
52237 \begin_layout Description
52238 undertilde is used for the math command
52247 Accents for one Character
52256 \begin_layout Section
52260 \begin_layout Standard
52261 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
52264 \begin_layout Standard
52265 Details are described in the section
52268 \begin_inset space ~
52276 \begin_inset space ~
52284 \begin_layout Section
52288 \begin_layout Standard
52289 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
52291 Program Code Listings
52296 \begin_inset space ~
52304 \begin_layout Section
52308 \begin_layout Standard
52309 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
52318 set to be used and set the
52323 The itemize environment is described in section
52324 \begin_inset space ~
52328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52330 reference "sec:Itemize"
52338 \begin_layout Standard
52339 You can furthermore specify a
52342 \begin_inset space ~
52347 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52348 command of the desired character.
52349 For example to use the € sign,
52350 you have to insert the command
52357 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
52359 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52363 \begin_inset space \space{}
52367 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
52377 To find the command for a math symbol,
52378 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
52381 \begin_layout Standard
52382 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52391 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52392 -packages in the preamble (menu
52394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52395 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52398 \begin_inset space ~
52404 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
52408 usepackage{textcomp}
52411 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
52415 usepackage{amssymb}
52425 \begin_layout Section
52429 \begin_layout Standard
52430 Branches are described in section
52431 \begin_inset space ~
52435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52437 reference "sec:Branches"
52445 \begin_layout Section
52447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52449 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
52456 \begin_layout Standard
52457 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
52460 \begin_layout Description
52462 \begin_inset space ~
52467 Save transient properties
52469 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
52470 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
52474 \begin_layout Itemize
52475 the activation of change tracking
52478 \begin_layout Itemize
52479 the output of tracked changes
52482 \begin_layout Itemize
52483 the recording of the document directory path.
52486 \begin_layout Standard
52487 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
52491 \begin_layout Description
52493 \begin_inset space ~
52497 \begin_inset space ~
52501 The format that is used when you enter
52502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52523 View Master Document
52524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52531 Update Master Document
52532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52539 menu or the toolbar.
52540 The default is set in
52542 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52543 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
52545 \begin_inset space ~
52548 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
52553 \begin_inset space ~
52557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52559 reference "sec:File-Formats"
52567 \begin_layout Description
52569 \begin_inset space ~
52573 \begin_inset space ~
52576 Options offers settings for the
52584 \begin_layout Itemize
52587 Synchronize with Output
52592 \begin_inset space ~
52597 and allows to customize the macro used in this process (for a detailed description see section
52599 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52604 \begin_inset space ~
52612 \begin_layout Itemize
52615 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
52617 determines whether so-called
52618 \begin_inset Quotes els
52622 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52626 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
52627 \begin_inset Quotes els
52631 \begin_inset Quotes ers
52634 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
52635 (such as sections or captions),
52636 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
52638 This setting is on by default,
52639 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
52641 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
52642 you can uncheck this.
52643 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
52645 just leave it checked.
52649 \begin_layout Description
52651 \begin_inset space ~
52655 \begin_inset space ~
52658 Options offers settings for the export format
52666 \begin_inset space ~
52671 will assure that the output follows exactly version
52672 \begin_inset space ~
52675 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
52679 \begin_inset space ~
52684 settings are described in detail in section
52686 Math Output in XHTML
52691 \begin_inset space ~
52700 \begin_inset space ~
52704 \begin_inset space ~
52709 is used for the size of equations in the output.
52712 \begin_layout Description
52714 \begin_inset space ~
52718 \begin_inset space ~
52721 Options offers settings for the export format
52724 The details for the options are described in the chapter
52730 Additional Features
52735 \begin_layout Description
52739 \begin_layout Description
52741 \begin_inset space ~
52745 \begin_inset space ~
52749 \begin_inset space ~
52752 programs If this is switched on,
52758 option which is needed with some packages.
52759 Note that this comes with security risks,
52760 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
52763 \begin_layout Section
52771 \begin_layout Standard
52772 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52773 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
52775 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
52777 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
52780 \begin_layout Standard
52781 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52782 -syntax is given in section
52783 \begin_inset space ~
52787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52789 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
52797 \begin_layout Chapter
52803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52805 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
52810 \begin_inset Index idx
52815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52824 \begin_layout Standard
52825 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
52827 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52831 It has the following submenus.
52834 \begin_layout Section
52838 \begin_layout Subsection
52842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52843 User Interface File
52844 \begin_inset Index idx
52849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52851 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52866 \begin_inset Index idx
52871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52873 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52890 \begin_layout Standard
52891 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
52892 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
52900 \begin_layout Description
52905 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
52908 \begin_layout Description
52915 the menu entries in popup context menus
52918 \begin_layout Description
52923 specifies the toolbar buttons
52926 \begin_layout Standard
52927 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
52928 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
52931 \begin_layout Standard
52932 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
52946 entries must be finished with an explicit
52976 and in the case of the
52977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52989 The syntax for the entries is:
52992 \begin_layout Standard
52993 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
52999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53022 \begin_layout Standard
53024 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53027 All the \SpecialChar LyX
53028 -functions are listed in the menu
53030 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
53032 \begin_inset space ~
53040 \begin_layout Standard
53041 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53047 \begin_layout Standard
53049 assuming you use the menu
53051 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
53054 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
53055 you can add the line
53058 \begin_layout Standard
53059 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53083 \begin_layout Standard
53085 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
53089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53100 to have the sixth bookmark.
53103 \begin_layout Standard
53107 \begin_inset space ~
53112 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
53113 's toolbar buttons.
53114 The currently available icon sets are compared in
53115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53118 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
53126 \begin_layout Standard
53130 \begin_inset space ~
53134 \begin_inset space ~
53139 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
53140 's user interface control elements.
53141 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
53142 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
53143 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
53144 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
53147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53151 \begin_layout Standard
53154 Enable tool tips in main work area
53156 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
53159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53163 \begin_layout Standard
53168 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
53169 should display in the menu
53171 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53173 \begin_inset space ~
53181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53185 \begin_layout Standard
53186 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
53191 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
53192 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
53193 the text then appears centered.
53196 \begin_layout Subsection
53200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53204 \begin_layout Standard
53207 Restore window layouts and geometries
53210 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53214 \begin_layout Standard
53217 Restore cursor positions
53219 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
53222 \begin_layout Standard
53225 Load opened files from last session
53227 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
53231 \begin_layout Standard
53234 Clear all session information
53236 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
53237 sessions (cursor positions,
53238 names of last opened documents,
53242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53246 name "subsec:Backup documents"
53251 \begin_inset Index idx
53256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53258 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53275 \begin_layout Standard
53278 Backup original documents when saving
53280 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was saved the last time.
53281 It is stored in the
53284 \begin_inset space ~
53290 \begin_inset space ~
53294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53296 reference "sec:Paths"
53301 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
53304 \begin_inset space ~
53310 The backup file has the file extension
53314 and the same name than the original file.
53318 \begin_inset space ~
53324 the file has the full path in its file name,
53326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53341 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
53346 \begin_layout Standard
53349 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
53352 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
53353 These files which are stored as
53357 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
53358 Should \SpecialChar LyX
53359 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
53360 this file can be used as a resort.
53363 \begin_layout Standard
53364 Please read section
53365 \begin_inset space ~
53369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53371 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
53375 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
53376 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
53379 \begin_layout Standard
53382 Save documents compressed by default
53384 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
53385 \begin_inset space ~
53389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53391 reference "subsec:Compressed"
53397 This applies to newly created documents only.
53398 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
53401 \begin_layout Standard
53404 Save the document directory path
53406 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
53408 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
53409 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
53412 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53413 Windows & work area
53416 \begin_layout Standard
53419 Open documents in tabs
53422 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53426 \begin_layout Standard
53431 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
53436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53438 \begin_inset space ~
53442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53444 reference "sec:Paths"
53449 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
53458 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
53460 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
53461 instance is created for each file.
53464 \begin_layout Standard
53467 Single close-tab button
53470 there will only be one close button (
53480 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
53481 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
53482 Regardless of this option,
53483 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
53486 \begin_layout Standard
53487 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53496 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
53497 before the change takes effect.
53505 \begin_layout Standard
53510 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
53511 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
53513 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
53517 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
53518 and only want to close the view in once instance.
53521 \begin_layout Subsection
53523 \begin_inset Index idx
53528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53530 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53547 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
53554 \begin_layout Standard
53555 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
53559 \begin_layout Standard
53560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
53563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53569 This section only deals with the fonts
53573 the \SpecialChar LyX
53575 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
53576 and set in the menu
53578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53579 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53590 \begin_layout Standard
53610 (depends on the system) as its
53613 \begin_inset space ~
53629 \begin_layout Standard
53630 You can change the font size with the
53637 \begin_layout Standard
53642 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
53644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53647 points have the size of 1
53648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53653 \begin_inset space ~
53657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53659 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
53665 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
53666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53670 The sizes are explained in detail in section
53671 \begin_inset space ~
53675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53677 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
53685 \begin_layout Subsection
53687 \begin_inset Index idx
53692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53694 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53710 \begin_inset Index idx
53715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53717 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53734 \begin_layout Standard
53735 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
53736 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
53743 \begin_layout Standard
53744 By checking the option
53748 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
53756 \begin_inset space ~
53760 \begin_inset space ~
53765 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
53768 \begin_layout Subsection
53770 \begin_inset Index idx
53775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53777 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53794 \begin_layout Standard
53795 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
53799 \begin_layout Standard
53804 enables previewing snippets of your document.
53805 This feature is described in section
53806 \begin_inset space ~
53810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53812 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
53820 \begin_layout Standard
53821 Checking the option
53824 \begin_inset space ~
53828 \begin_inset space ~
53832 \begin_inset space ~
53837 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
53840 \begin_layout Section
53842 \begin_inset Index idx
53847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53849 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53866 \begin_layout Subsection
53870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53874 \begin_layout Standard
53877 Cursor follows scrollbar
53879 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
53882 \begin_layout Standard
53883 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
53884 If you set the value to zero,
53885 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
53888 \begin_layout Standard
53891 Scroll below end of document
53893 is self-explanatory.
53896 \begin_layout Standard
53897 In \SpecialChar LyX
53898 one can jump from word to word by pressing
53905 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
53907 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
53908 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
53911 \begin_layout Standard
53914 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
53916 is only relevant in documents that
53922 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
53930 markup) with this option selected.
53931 It the option is not selected,
53932 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
53933 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53938 \begin_inset Quotes els
53942 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53946 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
53947 dissolving from insets.
53958 \begin_inset Quotes els
53962 \begin_inset Quotes ers
53965 notwithstanding the state of this option.
53968 \begin_layout Standard
53971 Sort environments alphabetically
53973 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53976 \begin_layout Standard
53979 Group environments by their category
53981 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
53984 \begin_layout Standard
53989 options determine the editing style for math macros,
54001 \begin_layout Standard
54004 Search drive for cited files
54006 allows \SpecialChar LyX
54007 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
54010 \begin_inset space ~
54014 \begin_inset space ~
54018 \begin_inset space ~
54022 \begin_inset space ~
54025 Content\SpecialChar ldots
54028 context menu on a citation.
54033 field determines the search pattern.
54035 \begin_inset space ~
54039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54041 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
54049 \begin_layout Subsection
54051 \begin_inset Index idx
54056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54063 \begin_inset Index idx
54068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54070 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54087 \begin_layout Standard
54092 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
54094 Several binding files are available,
54098 \begin_layout Description
54099 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
54102 \begin_layout Description
54103 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
54114 \begin_layout Description
54115 mac.bind a set of bindings for
54118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54126 \begin_layout Standard
54127 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
54133 and binding files for special languages.
54134 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
54136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54140 \begin_inset space \space{}
54144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54152 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
54153 in a certain language,
54155 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
54158 \begin_layout Standard
54159 Some binding files,
54165 only have a limited scope.
54166 When looking at the end of the file
54171 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
54174 \begin_layout Standard
54178 \begin_inset space ~
54182 \begin_inset space ~
54187 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
54190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
54192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54194 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
54199 \begin_inset Index idx
54204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54206 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54223 \begin_layout Standard
54224 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
54225 functions and the bound shortcuts.
54226 To find functions easily,
54227 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
54229 Show key-bindings containing
54232 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
54233 Insert there for example as keyword
54234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54241 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
54242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54251 one function can have more than one shortcut.
54252 All \SpecialChar LyX
54253 functions are also listed in the file
54258 that you will find in the
54265 \begin_layout Standard
54267 to add the shortcut
54276 select the function and press the
54281 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
54282 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
54285 \begin_layout Standard
54286 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
54287 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
54288 Function definition with “
54290 command-alternatives
54292 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
54294 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
54297 \begin_layout Standard
54298 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
54302 \begin_layout Standard
54303 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
54304 The syntax of the entries is:
54307 \begin_layout Standard
54313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54332 \begin_layout Standard
54335 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
54336 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
54337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54370 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
54371 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
54372 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
54373 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
54378 you needed to specify it as
54383 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
54384 you don't have to care for these specifics.
54386 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
54389 \begin_layout Subsection
54391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54393 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
54398 \begin_inset Index idx
54403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54410 \begin_inset Index idx
54415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54417 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54434 \begin_layout Standard
54435 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
54436 For the case where this is not possible,
54438 provides keyboard maps.
54441 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
54445 \begin_inset space ~
54449 \begin_inset space ~
54454 and select the keyboard map file named
54461 \begin_layout Standard
54476 you can select the first and second with
54479 arg "keymap-primary"
54485 arg "keymap-secondary"
54488 respectively or toggle between them with
54491 arg "keymap-toggle"
54497 \begin_layout Standard
54498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
54501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54507 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
54515 \begin_layout Standard
54516 You can also specify the mouse
54518 Wheel scrolling speed
54521 The standard value is 1.0;
54522 higher values speed up the scrolling,
54523 lower ones slow it down.
54526 Middle mouse button pasting
54528 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
54531 \begin_layout Standard
54539 \begin_inset space ~
54543 \begin_inset space ~
54549 you can select a key for zooming.
54550 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
54551 the text is zoomed.
54554 \begin_layout Subsection
54558 \begin_layout Standard
54559 Input completion is described in section
54560 \begin_inset space ~
54564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54566 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
54574 \begin_layout Section
54576 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54583 \begin_inset Index idx
54588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54595 \begin_inset Index idx
54600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54602 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54619 \begin_layout Standard
54620 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
54621 are normally determined during the installation.
54622 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
54625 \begin_layout Description
54627 \begin_inset space ~
54630 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
54631 's working directory.
54632 It is the default when you
54644 \begin_inset space ~
54652 \begin_layout Description
54654 \begin_inset space ~
54657 templates This directory contains the templates that are shown in
54659 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54661 \begin_inset space ~
54665 \begin_inset space ~
54673 \begin_layout Description
54675 \begin_inset space ~
54678 files This directory contains the example files that are listed in
54680 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
54686 \begin_layout Description
54688 \begin_inset space ~
54692 \begin_inset Index idx
54697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54699 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54713 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
54714 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
54715 \begin_inset space ~
54719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54721 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54731 will be used to save the backups.
54732 \begin_inset Newline newline
54735 Backup files have the ending
54736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54746 \begin_layout Description
54748 \begin_inset space ~
54751 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
54752 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
54754 \begin_inset Newline newline
54762 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54768 You can edit this file with the program
54777 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
54778 in its preferences under
54781 \begin_inset space ~
54787 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
54792 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
54794 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
54801 and \SpecialChar LyX
54802 need to be running the same time.
54803 \begin_inset Newline newline
54806 The pipe is also used for the
54812 \begin_inset space ~
54816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54818 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
54824 \begin_inset Newline newline
54827 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
54828 Server-Pipe on Windows,
54829 you must use this pipe name:
54830 \begin_inset Newline newline
54846 \begin_layout Description
54848 \begin_inset space ~
54851 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
54854 \begin_layout Description
54856 \begin_inset space ~
54859 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
54860 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54863 \begin_layout Description
54865 \begin_inset space ~
54868 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
54873 You only need to specify it if you are using
54877 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
54878 For \SpecialChar LyX
54883 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
54886 \begin_layout Description
54888 \begin_inset space ~
54891 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
54892 When \SpecialChar LyX
54893 needs to use an external program,
54894 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
54895 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
54897 so you normally don't have to modify it.
54899 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54907 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
54910 \begin_layout Description
54912 \begin_inset space ~
54915 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
54916 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
54917 code or in the document preamble.
54918 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
54919 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
54920 If files are included,
54921 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
54922 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
54924 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
54925 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
54928 \begin_layout Section
54932 \begin_layout Standard
54933 Here you can insert your
54942 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
54943 as described in section
54944 \begin_inset space ~
54948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54950 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54956 to mark changes you make as yours.
54959 \begin_layout Section
54961 \begin_inset Index idx
54966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54968 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54983 \begin_inset Index idx
54988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55007 \begin_layout Subsection
55009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55011 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
55018 \begin_layout Description
55020 \begin_inset space ~
55024 \begin_inset space ~
55027 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
55029 You can find its actual translation status here:
55031 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55033 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
55041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55042 LaTeX Language Support
55045 \begin_layout Description
55047 \begin_inset space ~
55050 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
55051 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
55052 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
55053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55069 The most widespread language package is
55074 \begin_inset Index idx
55079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55082 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55097 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
55099 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55100 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55101 come with the alternative language package
55106 \begin_inset Index idx
55111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55114 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55128 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
55130 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
55135 The available selections are described in section
55136 \begin_inset space ~
55140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55142 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
55150 \begin_layout Description
55152 \begin_inset space ~
55155 start Here you customize the command that is used to switch to a different language.
55156 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
55160 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
55161 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
55164 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
55168 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
55176 which needs the start command
55191 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55198 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55205 this setting is ignored.
55208 \begin_layout Description
55210 \begin_inset space ~
55213 end Use this if the language switch set in
55217 needs to be explicitly ended,
55222 's alternative command
55226 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
55227 \SpecialChar allowbreak
55230 end{otherlanguage*}
55238 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55240 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
55244 selectlanguage{$$lang}
55252 this setting is ignored.
55255 \begin_layout Description
55257 \begin_inset space ~
55261 \begin_inset space ~
55264 globally If this option is set,
55265 the languages used in the document will be added to the document class options rather than the language package options.
55266 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
55268 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way.
55271 \begin_layout Description
55273 \begin_inset space ~
55277 \begin_inset space ~
55281 \begin_inset space ~
55284 explicitly If this option is set,
55285 the language switch defined in
55288 \begin_inset space ~
55293 is output at the beginning of the document,
55294 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
55295 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
55296 This might be needed if you use a non-default
55299 \begin_inset space ~
55304 or if a package resets the document language.
55306 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
55309 \begin_layout Description
55311 \begin_inset space ~
55315 \begin_inset space ~
55319 \begin_inset space ~
55322 explicitly Counterpart to
55324 Set document language explicitly
55331 \begin_inset space ~
55336 is output at the end of the document.
55339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55340 \paragraph_spacing single
55344 \begin_layout Description
55346 \begin_inset space ~
55350 \begin_inset space ~
55354 all text in a language different to the document language will be marked (by default with a blue underline).
55357 \begin_layout Description
55359 \begin_inset space ~
55363 \begin_inset space ~
55366 movement Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves when writing scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
55373 \begin_layout Standard
55378 means that the cursor follows the logic of the text direction,
55379 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
55381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55385 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
55386 Hebrew embedded in English),
55387 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
55392 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
55393 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
55394 right arrow in this specific case always means:
55399 in text (even if this means:
55405 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
55406 since the cursor then follows a coherent
55407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55417 \begin_layout Standard
55423 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
55425 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
55426 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
55431 ) when coming from the left.
55432 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
55433 at the expense of the text logic.
55437 \begin_layout Subsubsection
55441 \begin_layout Description
55443 \begin_inset space ~
55447 \begin_inset space ~
55450 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
55452 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
55453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
55459 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
55462 \begin_layout Description
55464 \begin_inset space ~
55468 \begin_inset space ~
55471 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
55475 \begin_layout Subsection
55479 \begin_layout Standard
55480 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
55481 \begin_inset space ~
55485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55487 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
55495 \begin_layout Section
55499 \begin_layout Subsection
55501 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55503 name "subsec:General-output"
55510 \begin_layout Description
55512 \begin_inset space ~
55515 search Commands that will be used for the menu
55517 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
55519 \begin_inset space ~
55525 For a detailed description see section
55527 Reverse DVI/PDF search
55532 \begin_inset space ~
55540 \begin_layout Description
55542 \begin_inset space ~
55545 Options Options for the program
55549 that is used for the export format
55555 \begin_inset space ~
55559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55561 reference "subsec:Export"
55567 Possible options are listed in the
55572 \begin_inset Newline newline
55576 \begin_inset Flex URL
55579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55581 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
55591 \begin_layout Description
55593 \begin_inset space ~
55597 \begin_inset space ~
55600 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
55602 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
55603 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
55605 \begin_inset space ~
55611 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
55614 \begin_layout Description
55616 \begin_inset space ~
55620 \begin_inset space ~
55623 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
55624 is allowed to overwrite on export.
55627 \begin_layout Subsection
55633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55635 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
55640 \begin_inset Index idx
55645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55647 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55665 \begin_layout Description
55667 \begin_inset space ~
55671 \begin_inset space ~
55675 \begin_inset space ~
55679 \begin_inset space ~
55682 options They only have an effect when the program
55686 is used as DVI-viewer,
55687 read its manual to find out more.
55690 \begin_layout Standard
55691 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
55692 But before you change something,
55693 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
55696 \begin_layout Description
55698 \begin_inset space ~
55701 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
55703 \begin_inset space ~
55707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55709 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
55717 \begin_layout Description
55719 \begin_inset space ~
55722 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
55724 \begin_inset space ~
55728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55730 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
55738 \begin_layout Description
55740 \begin_inset space ~
55743 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
55745 \begin_inset space ~
55749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55751 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
55759 \begin_layout Description
55765 \begin_inset space ~
55768 command Command for the program
55770 Check\SpecialChar TeX
55773 that is described in the section
55775 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
55780 Additional Features
55785 \begin_layout Standard
55786 There are additionally the following options:
55789 \begin_layout Description
55791 \begin_inset space ~
55795 \begin_inset space ~
55799 \begin_inset space ~
55803 \begin_inset space ~
55808 \begin_inset space ~
55811 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
55813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55830 to separate folders.
55831 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
55833 \begin_inset Index idx
55838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55845 \begin_inset Index idx
55850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55852 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55869 \begin_layout Description
55871 \begin_inset space ~
55875 \begin_inset space ~
55879 \begin_inset space ~
55883 \begin_inset space ~
55887 \begin_inset space ~
55891 \begin_inset space ~
55894 changes Removes all manually set
55900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
55901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
55903 \begin_inset space ~
55908 dialog when changing the document class.
55911 \begin_layout Section
55913 \begin_inset space ~
55917 \begin_inset Index idx
55922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55931 \begin_layout Subsection
55933 \begin_inset CommandInset label
55935 name "subsec:Converters"
55940 \begin_inset Index idx
55945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55954 \begin_layout Standard
55955 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
55956 You can modify converters or create new ones.
55957 To modify a converter,
55959 change the entry of the
55966 \begin_inset space ~
55971 field and press the
55976 To create a new converter,
55977 select an existing one,
55978 select a different format in the
55981 \begin_inset space ~
55991 field and press the
55998 \begin_layout Standard
56001 Converter File Cache
56008 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
56010 Maximum Age (in days
56013 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
56014 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
56017 \begin_layout Standard
56018 More about converters,
56019 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
56020 is described in the section
56031 \begin_layout Subsection
56033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56035 name "sec:File-Formats"
56040 \begin_inset Index idx
56045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56052 \begin_inset Index idx
56057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56066 \begin_layout Standard
56067 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
56077 programs that should be used for certain formats.
56080 \begin_layout Standard
56081 You can also define the
56083 Default output format
56085 that is used when you use
56089 View Master Document
56093 Update Master Document
56099 menu or the toolbar.
56102 \begin_layout Standard
56103 More about formats and their options is described in the section
56114 \begin_layout Standard
56115 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
56116 's temporary directory,
56117 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
56118 This is done by specifying a
56123 More about this is described in the section
56134 \begin_layout Chapter
56135 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56137 \begin_inset Index idx
56142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56151 name "chap:Units-available-in"
56158 \begin_layout Standard
56160 \begin_inset space ~
56164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56166 reference "tab:Units"
56171 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
56172 and used in this documentation.
56175 \begin_layout Standard
56176 \begin_inset Float table
56183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56184 \begin_inset Caption Standard
56186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56202 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
56208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56210 \begin_inset Tabular
56211 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
56212 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
56213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56214 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
56215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
56217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56368 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
56372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56566 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56570 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56639 scaled point (65536
56640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56707 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
56712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56831 % of original image width
56836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
56890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
56899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56920 \begin_layout Standard
56921 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
56924 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
56931 \begin_layout Bibliography
56932 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56933 LatexCommand bibitem
56940 The \SpecialChar LyX
56943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
56946 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
56952 \begin_inset Newline newline
56956 \begin_inset Flex URL
56959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56961 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
56969 \begin_layout Bibliography
56970 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56971 LatexCommand bibitem
56972 key "latexcompanion"
56977 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
56980 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
56981 Companion Second Edition.
56988 \begin_layout Bibliography
56989 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
56990 LatexCommand bibitem
56996 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
57000 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
57008 \begin_layout Bibliography
57009 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57010 LatexCommand bibitem
57021 A Document Preparation System.
57029 \begin_layout Bibliography
57030 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57031 LatexCommand bibitem
57041 The \SpecialChar TeX
57049 \begin_layout Bibliography
57050 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57051 LatexCommand bibitem
57057 The \SpecialChar TeX
57059 \begin_inset Newline newline
57063 \begin_inset Flex URL
57066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57068 https://ctan.org/topic
57076 \begin_layout Bibliography
57077 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57078 LatexCommand bibitem
57084 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
57086 \begin_inset Newline newline
57090 \begin_inset Flex URL
57093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57095 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
57103 \begin_layout Bibliography
57104 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57105 LatexCommand bibitem
57112 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57114 name "Documentation"
57115 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
57122 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57126 \begin_inset Newline newline
57130 \begin_inset Flex URL
57133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57135 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
57143 \begin_layout Bibliography
57144 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57145 LatexCommand bibitem
57152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57154 name "Documentation"
57155 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
57160 how to use the program
57162 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
57166 \begin_inset Newline newline
57170 \begin_inset Flex URL
57173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57175 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
57183 \begin_layout Bibliography
57184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57185 LatexCommand bibitem
57192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57194 name "Documentation"
57195 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
57200 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57206 \begin_inset Index idx
57211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57214 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57229 \begin_inset Newline newline
57233 \begin_inset Flex URL
57236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57238 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
57246 \begin_layout Bibliography
57247 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57248 LatexCommand bibitem
57255 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57257 name "Documentation"
57258 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
57263 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57269 \begin_inset Index idx
57274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57292 \begin_inset Newline newline
57296 \begin_inset Flex URL
57299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57301 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
57309 \begin_layout Bibliography
57310 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57311 LatexCommand bibitem
57318 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57320 name "Documentation"
57321 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
57331 \begin_inset Newline newline
57335 \begin_inset Flex URL
57338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57340 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
57348 \begin_layout Bibliography
57349 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57350 LatexCommand bibitem
57351 key "makeindex-man"
57357 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57360 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
57370 \begin_inset Newline newline
57374 \begin_inset Flex URL
57377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57379 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
57387 \begin_layout Bibliography
57388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57389 LatexCommand bibitem
57396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57398 name "Documentation"
57399 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
57409 \begin_inset Newline newline
57413 \begin_inset Flex URL
57416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57418 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
57426 \begin_layout Bibliography
57427 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57428 LatexCommand bibitem
57435 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57437 name "Documentation"
57438 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
57448 \begin_inset Newline newline
57452 \begin_inset Flex URL
57455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57457 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
57465 \begin_layout Bibliography
57466 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57467 LatexCommand bibitem
57474 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57476 name "Documentation"
57477 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
57482 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
57484 \begin_inset Newline newline
57488 \begin_inset Flex URL
57491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57493 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
57501 \begin_layout Bibliography
57502 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57503 LatexCommand bibitem
57510 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57512 name "Documentation"
57513 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
57518 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57524 \begin_inset Index idx
57529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57532 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57547 \begin_inset Newline newline
57551 \begin_inset Flex URL
57554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57556 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
57564 \begin_layout Bibliography
57565 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57566 LatexCommand bibitem
57573 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57575 name "Documentation"
57576 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
57581 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57587 \begin_inset Index idx
57592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57595 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57610 \begin_inset Newline newline
57614 \begin_inset Flex URL
57617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57619 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
57627 \begin_layout Bibliography
57628 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57629 LatexCommand bibitem
57636 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57638 name "Documentation"
57639 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
57644 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57650 \begin_inset Index idx
57655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57658 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57673 \begin_inset Newline newline
57677 \begin_inset Flex URL
57680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57682 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
57690 \begin_layout Bibliography
57691 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57692 LatexCommand bibitem
57699 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57701 name "Documentation"
57702 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
57707 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57713 \begin_inset Index idx
57718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57721 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57736 \begin_inset Newline newline
57740 \begin_inset Flex URL
57743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57745 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
57753 \begin_layout Bibliography
57754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57755 LatexCommand bibitem
57762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57764 name "Documentation"
57765 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
57770 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57776 \begin_inset Index idx
57781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57784 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57799 \begin_inset Newline newline
57803 \begin_inset Flex URL
57806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57808 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
57816 \begin_layout Bibliography
57817 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57818 LatexCommand bibitem
57825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57827 name "Documentation"
57828 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
57833 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57839 \begin_inset Index idx
57844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57847 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57862 \begin_inset Newline newline
57866 \begin_inset Flex URL
57869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57871 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
57879 \begin_layout Bibliography
57880 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57881 LatexCommand bibitem
57888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57890 name "Documentation"
57891 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
57896 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57902 \begin_inset Index idx
57907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57910 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57925 \begin_inset Newline newline
57929 \begin_inset Flex URL
57932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57934 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
57942 \begin_layout Bibliography
57943 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
57944 LatexCommand bibitem
57951 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57953 name "Documentation"
57954 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
57959 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57965 \begin_inset Index idx
57970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57973 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57988 \begin_inset Newline newline
57992 \begin_inset Flex URL
57995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57997 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
58005 \begin_layout Bibliography
58006 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58007 LatexCommand bibitem
58014 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58017 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
58022 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58024 \begin_inset Newline newline
58028 \begin_inset Flex URL
58031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58033 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
58041 \begin_layout Bibliography
58042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58043 LatexCommand bibitem
58050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58053 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
58058 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58060 \begin_inset Newline newline
58064 \begin_inset Flex URL
58067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58069 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
58077 \begin_layout Bibliography
58078 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58079 LatexCommand bibitem
58086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58089 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
58094 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58095 for Cyrillic languages:
58096 \begin_inset Newline newline
58100 \begin_inset Flex URL
58103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58105 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
58113 \begin_layout Bibliography
58114 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58115 LatexCommand bibitem
58122 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58125 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
58130 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58132 \begin_inset Newline newline
58136 \begin_inset Flex URL
58139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58141 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
58149 \begin_layout Bibliography
58150 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58151 LatexCommand bibitem
58158 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58161 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
58166 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58168 \begin_inset Newline newline
58172 \begin_inset Flex URL
58175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58177 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
58185 \begin_layout Bibliography
58186 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
58187 LatexCommand bibitem
58194 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58197 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
58202 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
58204 \begin_inset Newline newline
58208 \begin_inset Flex URL
58211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58213 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
58221 \begin_layout Standard
58222 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
58229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58257 \begin_inset Note Note
58260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58267 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
58268 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
58276 \begin_layout Standard
58277 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
58278 LatexCommand bibtex
58279 btprint "btPrintCited"
58280 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
58289 \begin_layout Standard
58290 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
58294 \begin_layout Standard
58298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58304 pagedeclaration}[1]{
58307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58314 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
58322 \begin_inset Note Note
58325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58326 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
58328 \begin_inset space ~
58332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58334 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
58347 \begin_layout Standard
58348 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
58349 LatexCommand printnomenclature
58355 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
58356 LatexCommand printindex